ZONING BY-LAW By-law number CA

Transcription

1 ZONING BY-LAW By-law number CA

2 PROVINCE OF QUÉBEC BY-LAW NUMBER CA CITY OF MONTRÉAL ZONING BY-LAW BOROUGH OF PIERREFONDS-ROXBORO DRAFT BY-LAW: February NOTICE OF MOTION: May ADOPTION: June COMING INTO FORCE: July Modifications included in this document By-law Number Date of Coming into Force CA March 30, 2011 CA Withdrawn May 3, 2011 CA April 28, 2011 CA August 30, 2011 CA August 30, 2011 CA August 30, 2011 CA Appendix C modified November 14, 2011 CA February 29, 2012 CA September 26, 2012 CA February 1, 2013

3 i TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 DECLARATORY AND INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS...1 SECTION 1: DECLARATORY PROVISIONS TITLE OF THE BY-LAW TERRITORY AFFECTED SCOPE OF APPLICATION ACTS AND REGULATIONS DOCUMENTS ATTACHED REPLACEMENT TABLES, GRAPHICS AND SYMBOLS...3 SECTION 2: GENERAL INTERPRTIVE PROVISIONS UNITS OF MEASUREMENT RULES OF PRECEDENCE FOR THE PROVISIONS RULES OF PRECEDENCE FOR GENERAL AND SPECIFIC PROVISIONS REFERENCES BY-LAW STRUCTURE TERMINOLOGY...4 SECTION 3: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO DIVISION INTO ZONES DIVISION OF THE TERRITORY INTO ZONES IDENTIFICATION OF ZONES INTERPRETING THE ZONE BOUNDARIES ON THE ZONING PLAN...5 SECTION 4: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS CHARTS GENERAL SCOPE OF THE SPECIFICATIONS CHARTS RULES OF INTERPRETATION FOR THE SPECIFICATIONS CHART MIXED-USE BUILDING LANDSITE INCLUDED IN MORE THAN ONE ZONE...13 SECTION 5: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO USE CODES RULES FOR INTERPRETING USE CODES...14 CHAPTER 2 ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS APPLICATION OF THE BY-LAW POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE DESIGNATED OFFICIAL VIOLATIONS, SANCTIONS, RECOURSE AND PROSECUTION...16 CHAPTER 3 TERMINOLOGY TERMINOLOGY...17 CHAPTER 4 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE CLASSIFICATION OF MAIN LAND USES...64 SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS USE GROUPS REFERENCE TO THE USES EXCLUSIVITY OF THE GROUPS, CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES OF USES...65 Table of contents

4 ii 29. SCOPE OF THE LISTING OF USES...65 SECTION 2: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP USE CATEGORIES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) TWO-FAMILY AND THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4)...66 SECTION 3: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP USE CATEGORIES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP RETAIL SALES AND SERVICES (C1) COMMERCIAL ENTERTAINMENT, LODGING AND FOOD SERVICES (C2) AUTOMOBILE SERVICES (C3) DISTINCTIVE BUSINESSES AND SERVICES (C4) HEAVY ARTERIAL COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES, WHOLESALE BUSINESSES AND PARA- INDUSTRIAL SERVICES (C5)...75 SECTION 4: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) USE CATEGORIES FOR THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT (I1) INDUSTRIAL MANUFACTURING (I2) EXPLOITATION OF RAW MATERIALS (I3)...80 SECTION 5: CLASSIFICATION OF LAND USES FOR THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP USE CATEGORIES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP RECREATION (P1) INSTITUTIONS (P2) SERVICES (P3)...83 SECTION 6: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE RECREATION (R) GROUPE USE CATEGORIES IN THE RECREATION (R) GROUP EXTENSIVE RECREATION (R1) EXTREME AND MOTORIZED SPORTS (R2)...85 SECTION 7: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP USE CATEGORIES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP AGRICULTURAL WITHOUT LIVESTOCK (A1) AGRICULTURE WITH LIVESTOCK (A2)...87 SECTION 8 : LAND USE CLASSIFICATION IN THE CONSERVATION (E) GROUP USE CATEGORIES IN THE CONSERVATION (E) GROUP CONSERVATION PARK (E1)...88 SECTION 9: AUTHORIZED OR PROHIBITED USES AUTHORIZED OR PROHIBITED USES BY ZONE USES AUTHORIZED IN ALL ZONES USES PROHIBITED IN ALL ZONES...90 CHAPTER 5 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS SCOPE OF THE CHAPTER...92 SECTION 1: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR ALL USES BLOOD COLLECTION...92 Table of contents

5 iii 62. CONSTRUCTION SITE HUT REAL ESTATE SALES OFFICE...93 SECTION 2: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP WINTER GARAGE, WINTER DOORWAY SHELTER AND WINTER TUNNEL...93 SECTION 3: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP STAND FOR THE OUTDOOR SALE OF CHRSITMAS TREES FOR A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP FAIRS, FESTIVALS, PUBLIC CELEBRATIONS, FAIRGROUNDS AND CIRCUSES FOR A SHOPPING CENTRE OR AN INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL PROJECT...94 SECTION 5: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP WINTER DOORWAY SHELTER AND WINTER TUNNEL FAIRS, FESTIVALS, PUBLIC CELEBRATIONS, FAIRGROUNDS AND CIRCUSES FOR A USE IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP...96 CHAPTER 6 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES...97 SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR EXERCISING ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES...97 SECTION 2: USES ADDITIONAL TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1), TWO- FAMILY DWELLING AND THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) AND MULTI-FAMILY HOUSING (H3) USE CATEGORIES ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) USE CATEGORY ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR A BUILDING WITH MORE THAN 60 DWELLING UNITS OR MORE THAN 120 ROOMS GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF BOARDING ROOMS SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF SERVICE BUSINESS SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF HOME CHILDCARE SERVICE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF ADDITIONAL DWELLING UNIT SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF TOURIST B&B-TYPE ACCOMMODATION SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE AUTHORIZED IN A BUILDING WITH MORE THAN 60 DWELLING UNITS OR MORE THAN 120 ROOMS SECTION 3: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF COIN-OPERATED AMUSEMENT ARCADE, POOLHALL AND LOTTERY AND GAMES OF CHANCE Table of contents

6 iv 84. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT HOLDING A MEETING PERMIT IN VIRTUE OF THE ACT RESPECTING LIQUOR PERMITS (R.S.Q., C. P9.1) SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT WITH A RECEPTION OR BANQUET HALL SECTION 4: ADDITIONAL USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE SHOWROOM OR SALES AREA SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE SECTION 5: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF RETAIL SALE OF DRY GOODS CONSUMER PRODUCTS SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT WITH RECEPTION OR BANQUET HALL SECTION 6: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED AUTHORIZED DEPENDENT USE PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES SECTION 7: ADDITIONAL USES TO THE USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED GENERAL PROVISION APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM SPECIFIC PROVISION APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF ACTIVITY BY AN ARTISAN FOR PROCESSING AND PACKAGING A FARM PRODUCT OR SALE OF A FARM PRODUCT SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF FARM MEAL SERVICE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF SUGAR SHACK MEAL SERVICE CHAPTER 7 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE SITING AND TO THE VOLUME OF A BUILDING OR A STRUCTURE Table of contents

7 v SECTION 1: PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO SETBACKS AND TO THE TRIANGLE OF VISIBILITY CALCULATING SETBACKS SIDE SETBACK APPLICABLE ON A CORNER LANDSITE SIDE SETBACK FOR A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING SIDE SETBACK APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY LATERAL 3 TYPE CONSTRUCTION SIDE AND REAR SETBACKS FOR A WALL WITH AN OPENING TRIANGLE OF VISIBILITY SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES SITING OF A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE STRUCTURE SITING OF AN ACCESSORY BUILDING SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES FOR THE HOUSING (H) GROUP MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS INSTALLATION OF A STOREY IN THE ATTIC SPACE DEVELOPMENTS OF AN INTEGRATED HOUSING PROJECT SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A RAIL LINE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ROWHOUSES SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS ZERO SETBACK FOR A LANDSITE ADJACENT TO A LANDSITE OCCUPIED OR INTENDED TO BE OCCUPIED BY A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP STANDARDS FOR INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL PROJECTS SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS ZERO SETBACK BORDERING A RAIL LINE SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A DWELLING SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A RAIL LINE SECTION 7: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS CHAPTER 8 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO USES, BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT AND PROJECTIONS INTO YARDS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS INTERPRETING THE TABLES SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A BUILDING THAT IS SEMI-DETACHED OR A ROW HOUSE OR THAT HAS A ZERO SIDE SETBACK Table of contents

8 vi 140. ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ACCESSORY BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS RELATIVE TO A PRIVATE GARAGE OR A CARPORT ATTACHED TO OR INTEGRATED INTO A DWELLING REQUIREMENTS RELATIVE TO THE INSTALLATION OF A BELOW-GRADE GARAGE ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE STORAGE OF GARBAGE OR MATERIALS FOR RECYCLING ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DOMESTIC DISH ANTENNA OR A DOMESTIC ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A GAS BOTTLE OR CANISTER WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 KG SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING APPLICABLE TO SUBGROUP OF USES MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) AND COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4) SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR WITH A ZERO SIDE SETBACK ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A COMMERCIAL FOOD SERVICE TERRACE ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ENCLOSURE FOR SHOPPING CARTS ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN OUTDOOR DISPLAY ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN AREA FOR GARBAGE STORAGE SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANISTER OR TANK FOR GAS FUEL WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 KG OR TO A LIQUID FUEL TANK SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE OUTDOOR STORAGE OF A VEHICLE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANOPY THAT FORMS A SHELTER FOR GAS PUMPS SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CABIN FOR A GAS PUMP ATTENDANT OR A CASHIER SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR TO A ZERO SIDE SETBACK ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN AREA FOR GARBAGE STORAGE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A GAS CANISTER OR A GAS OR LIQUID GAS TANK SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE OUTDOOR STORAGE OF A VEHICLE Table of contents

9 vii SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR TO A ZERO SIDE SETBACK ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A FOOD SERVICE TERRACE ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO STORAGE FOR GARBAGE OR MATERIALS FOR RECYCLING SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANISTER OR TANK FOR GAS OR LIQUID FUEL SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SILO, A TANK OR A PUMP FOR LIQUID FUEL SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A STAND FOR THE SALE OF FARM PRODUCTS CHAPTER 9 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO LANDSITE ENTRANCES AND ACCESS AISLES TO PARKING AREAS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES SITING OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE LAYOUT OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR ACCESS AISLE USE OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE SHARED LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ACCESS AISLE RULE FOR CALCULATING THE WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR THE SITING OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE SPECIFIC PROVISIONS THE SITING OF A SEMI-CIRCULAR ACCESS AISLE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LANDSITE ENTRANCES WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE (CA ; ) SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P), RECREATIONAL (R) AND AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUPS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LANDSITE ENTRANCES WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE SPECIFIC PROVISION FOR THE ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM CHAPTER 10 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO OFF-STREET PARKING SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES NECCESSITY FOR AND MAINTENANCE OF A PARKING AREA USE OF A PARKING AREA RULES FOR CALCULATING THE NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES Table of contents

10 viii 199. DIMENSIONS OF PARKING SPACES AND OF CIRCULATION AISLES DESIGNATED PARKING SPACES FOR THE DISABLED LAYOUT OF A PARKING AREA SHARED PARKING AREA PARKING SPACES LOCATED ON A DIFFERENT LANDSITE THAN THE USE THEY SERVE INSTALLATION OF BICYCLE PARKING SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A BUILDING IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR AN COMMERCIAL (C) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF SCPACES FOR A LARGE COMMERCIAL BUILDING MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR AN INDUSTRIAL (I) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A COMMUNITY (P) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A RECREATIONAL (R) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS SECTION 7: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP SITING OF PARKING SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR THE ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM CHAPTER 11 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO LOADING BAYS AND BERTHS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES LAYOUT OF A LOADING BAY, DELIVERY AREA, BERTH AND MANŒUVERING AREA SHARED MANOEUVERING AREA Table of contents

11 ix 231. SITING OF A LOADING BAY, DELIVERY AREA, BERTH OR MANŒUVERING AREA SECTION 2: SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) OR INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP NUMBER OF LOADING BAYS, DELIVERY AREAS OR BERTHS REQUIRED FOR A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) OR INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP CHAPTER 12 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS ON A LANDSITE SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP LANDSCAPING OF THE FRONT YARD LANDSCAPING REQUIREMENTS FOR A USE IN THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY OUTDOOR LEISURE AREAS SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS MINIMUM LANDSCAPING REQUIREMENTS OUTDOOR LEISURE AREAS FOR A ROOM OR A DWELLING UNIT LANDSCAPING FOR A BUFFER STRIP BORDERING A DWELLING LANDSCAPING OF A BUFFER STRIP BORDERING A ZONE IN WHICH THE MAIN LAND USE OCCUPATION IS HOUSING (H), OR BORDERING A RECREATION (P1) OR INSTITUTION (P2) USE SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS FOR A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP CHAPTER 13 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE PLANTING AND FELLING OF TREES SECTION 1: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE PLANTING OF TREES TREE PLANTING REQUIRED SECTION 2 : PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO TREE MAINTENANCE PRESERVATION, MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT OF TREES REQUIRED TO BE PLANTED ON A LANDSITE PROTECTION OF TREES PRESENT ON A LANDSITE DURING CONSTRUCTION OR LANDSCAPING WORK SECTION 3 : PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE FELLING OF TREES TREE FELLING CHAPTER 14 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE ARCHITECTURE AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE BUILDINGS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES FORM AND APPEARANCE OF THE BUILDINGS STRUCTURE THAT MAY NOT BE USED AS A BUILDING MODULAR OR SINGLE-MODULE BUILDING EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS PROHIBITED FOR A ROOF Table of contents

12 x 250. EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR WALLS MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF EXTERIOR WOOD CLADDING REQUIREMENTS COMMON TO ALL USE GROUPS UNIFORMITY OF EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR A BUILDING WITH A SEMI- DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE STRUCTURE EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR THE RENOVATION OF A MAIN BUILDING EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR A BUILDING LOCATED ON A CORNER LANDSITE, A CORNER THROUGH LANDSITE OR A THROUGH LANDSITE ROOF SHAPES MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR THE BUILDING ROOFTOP STRUCTURE AND ROOFTOP HOUSING FOR EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO MICROCLIMATIC EFFECTS FOUNDATIONS STORAGE AREA SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE SINGLE- FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE TWO-FAMILY OR THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) CATEGORY EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) AND COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4) CATEGORIES EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A PRIVATE GARAGE DETACHED FROM THE MAIN BUILDING VOLUMETRY OF DETACHED AND SEMI-DETACHED DWELLINGS NUMBER AND EXTERIOR APPEARANCE OF GARAGE DOORS IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED PROVISION APPLICABLE TO A GARAGE SERVING A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP SECTION 4: PROVISION APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP FORM AND APPEARANCE OF AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR AN AGRICULTURAL BUILDING ARCHITECTURE OF A BUILDING FOR A DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM CHAPTER 15 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO FENCES AND WALLS SECTION 1: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES SITING OF A FENCE OR A WALL MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A FENCE MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL SNOW FENCE OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE ON A CONSTRUCTION SITE MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A RETAINING WALL OBLIGATION TO ERECT A RETAINING WALL OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE ON A RETAINING WALL SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN A REAR YARD AND A STREET LINE FENCE OR WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL FOR A HOUSING DEVELOPMENT Table of contents

13 xi SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF A FENCE OR WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN A REAR YARD AND A STREET LINE BARBED WIRE ON TOP OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP FENCE OR WALL FOR A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP BARBED WIRE ON TOP OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL CHAPTER 16 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE PROTECTION OF RIVERBANKS AND SHORELINES SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS WATERCOURSES AND LAKES TARGETED PROTECTION OF THE SHORELINE WIDTH OF THE RIVERBANK PROTECTION OF THE RIVERBANK CHAPTER 17 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO FLOODPLAINS IDENTIFICATION OF THE ZONES LOCATED ON FLOODPLAINS SCOPE OF THE STANDARDS APPLICABLE IN A FLOODPLAIN STANDARDS APPLICABLE IN A 0 20-YEAR HIGH-FLOW ZONE OF A FLOODPLAIN STANDARDS APPLICABLE IN A YEAR LOW-FLOW FLOOD ZONE STANDARDS FOR MINIMUM ELEVATIONS FOR BASEMENTS IN ZONES LOCATED BELOW THE LEVEL SHOWN ON PLAN ILLUSTRATING THE DRAINAGE BASINS CHAPTER 18 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO SIGNAGE SCOPE OF THE CHAPTER SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO DIFFERENT TYPES OF SIGNS SUB-SECTION 1: TYPOLOGY AND FEATURES OF THE SIGNS AUTHORIZED SIGN TYPOLOGIES PROVISIONS SPECIFIC TO A VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SUB-SECTION 2: INSTALLATION OF ATTACHED SIGNS INSTALLATION METHODS PERMITTED SITING OF AN ATTACHED SIGN WALL SIGN SIGN ON A DISPLAY WINDOW OR ON GLAZING BANNER OR AWNING SIGN SUB-SECTION 3: INSTALLATION OF DETACHED SIGNS INSTALLATION METHODS PERMITTED SITING OF A DETACHED SIGN SECTION 2: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AUTHORIZATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS, CONSTRUCTION AND CALCULATION RULES FOR SIGNS SUB-SECTION 1: GENERAL AUTHORIZATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS RELATIVE TO SIGNS Table of contents

14 xii 310. SIGNS AUTHORIZED WITHOUT A CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION TEMPORARY AUTHORIZED SIGN OBLIGATORY SIGN FOR ALL GROUPS OF USES PROHIBITED SIGNS LOCATIONS IN WHICH THE INSTALLATION OF AN OUTDOOR SIGN IS PROHIBITED SUB-SECTION 2: STRUCTURE, FORMAT, MESSAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF SIGNS STRUCTURE AND MAINTENANCE OF A SIGN FOUNDATIONS AND LANDSCAPING FOR A DETACHED SIGN SIGN ILLUMINATION PERMANENCE OF THE MESSAGE ON A SIGN SUB-SECTION 3: CALCULATION RULES APPLICABLE TO SIGNS GENERAL RULES FOR CALCULATING THE SURFACE AREA OF A SIGN SIGNS EXCLUDED FROM A CALCULATION OF THE TOTAL SURFACE AREA OF SIGNS SECTION 3: SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE BY ZONES SUB-SECTION 1: ZONES IN WHICH THE LAND USE OCCUPATION IS HOUSING (H) SIGNS AUTHORIZED SUB-SECTION 2: ZONES IN WHICH THE LAND USE OCCUPATION IS COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I) OR RECREATIONAL (R) SIGNS AUTHORIZED (CA ; ) SUB-SECTION 3: ZONES IN WHICH THE LAND USE OCCUPATION IS COMMUNITY (P) SIGNS AUTHORIZED SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADVERTISING PANEL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADVERTISING PANEL CHAPTER 19 PROVISIONS PARTICULAR TO CERTAIN USES APPLICATION OF THE PRESENT CHAPTER SECTION 1: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP MIXING OF A USE IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP WITH CERTAIN USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP MIXING OF A USE IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP WITH CERTAIN INCOMPATIBLE USES PROHIBITED MIXING OF A USE IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP WITH A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP IS PROHIBITED INSIDE A BUILDING SECTION 2 : PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP MIXING OF A USE IN THE INSTITUTIONS (P2) USE CATEGORY WITH CERTAIN USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP MIXING OF A USE IN THE INSTITUTIONS (P2) USE CATEGORY WITH CERTAIN INCOMPATIBLE USES PROHIBITED CHAPTER 20 PARTICULAR AND SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN ZONES SECTION 1: APPLICATION OF THE PROVISIONS IN THE PRESENT CHAPTER Table of contents

15 xiii 331. APPLICATION SECTION 2: PARTICULAR PROVISIONS APPLICABLE IN CERTAIN ZONES TYPES OF OUTDOOR STORAGE AUTHORIZED PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO OUTDOOR STORAGE AUTHORIZED ON A LANDSITE ON THE BOUNDARY OF ANOTHER BOROUGH SECTION 3: SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN ZONES SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE P SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONES C AND C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE P SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE P SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE H SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE H SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE H SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ZONE C SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE IN ZONE C SEMI-DETACHED, DETACHED OR LATERAL 3 TYPE CONSTRUCTIONS ON LANDSITESS WITH A FRONTAGE ON BOULEVARD GOUIN OUEST CHAPTER 21 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO ACQUIRED RIGHTS SECTION 1: PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO NON-CONFORMING USES DEFINITION OF A NON-CONFORMING USE ACQUIRED RIGHTS IN REGARD TO A NON-CONFORMING USE EXTINGUISHING ACQUIRED RIGHTS RELATIVE TO A USE REPLACING A NON-CONFORMING USE EXTENDING A NON-CONFORMING USE SECTION 2: PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURES DEFINITION OF A NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURE EXECUTION OF WORK NECESSARY TO RETAIN ACQUIRED RIGHTS EXTINGUISHING ACQUIRED RIGHTS RELATIVE TO A NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURE REPLACING A NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURE MOVING A NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURE MODIFYING OR ENLARGING A NON-CONFORMING STRUCTURE SECTION 3: PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO NON-CONFORMING SIGNS DEFINITION OF A NON-CONFORMING SIGN ACQUIRED RIGHTS IN REGARD TO A NON-CONFORMING SIGN EXECUTION OF WORK NECESSARY TO RETAIN ACQUIRED RIGHTS MODIFYING A NON-CONFORMING SIGN EXTINGUISHING ACQUIRED RIGHTS RELATIVE TO A SIGN REPLACING A NON-CONFORMING SIGN SECTION 4: SITING ON A NON-CONFORMING LOT IMPLEMENTATION OF A USE OR INSTALLATION OF A STRUCTURE ON A NON- CONFORMING LOT CHAPTER 22 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURES Table of contents

16 xiv 366. RECONSTRUCTION OR REPAIR OF DESTROYED BUILDINGS STANDARDS FOR CONNECTIONS CAPTURING RUNOFF WATER FROM BUSINESSES IN THE AUTOMOBILE SERVICES (C3) CATEGORY OF USES AND USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP CHAPTER 23 FINAL PROVISION COMING INTO FORCE APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS CHARTS APPENDIX B CODING FOR THE MAIN USES APPENDIX C ZONING PLAN APPENDIX D MINIMUM HEIGHT OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF A BASEMENT APPENDIX E PLAN OF FLOOD ZONES APPENDIX F DEVELOPMENT PLAN FOR THE INTEGRATED BUSINESS CENTRE PREPARED BY SERRENER CONSULTATION INC., DATED FEBRUARY APPENDIX G MAP TITLED «LE PATRIMOINE BÂTI» APPENDIX H MAP TITLED «LE PATRIMOINE NATUREL» APPENDIX I EMPHASIZING A LANDSITE ENTRANCE (CURB CUT) APPENDIX J STANDARDS FOR LANDSCAPING OR RE-LANDSCAPING RIVERBANKS Table of contents

17 1 THE BOROUGH COUNCIL OF PIERREFONDS-ROXBORO ORDERS THAT : CHAPTER 1 DECLARATORY AND INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS SECTION 1: DECLARATORY PROVISIONS 1. TITLE OF THE BY-LAW The by-law is titled Zoning By-law for the Borough of Pierrefonds-Roxboro. 2. TERRITORY AFFECTED The by-law applies to the whole territory under the jurisdiction of the Borough of Pierrefonds- Roxboro. 3. SCOPE OF APPLICATION A landsite, structure or installation, or a part thereof, must be constructed, occupied or used, depending on the case, in conformity with the provisions in the present by-law. The work carried out on a landsite, a structure or an installation, or on a part thereof, must be carried out in conformity with the provisions of the by-law. 4. ACTS AND REGULATIONS No provision in the by-law may be interpreted as the effect of exempting any person from the application of a provincial or federal law or regulation. 5. DOCUMENTS ATTACHED The following documents form an integral part of the by-law: 1 Specifications charts. These charts are part of Appendix A, which forms an integral part of the by-law. 2 The codification of main land uses. This codification is part of Appendix B, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 3 The zoning plan. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

18 2 This plan is part of Appendix C, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 4 Plan number , with the title Les élévations minimales de construction des sous-sols suivant les bassins de drainage de surface and dated February 20, This plan is part of Appendix D, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 5 Maps and elevations above sea level of the flood risk zones. These maps and elevations are part of Appendix E, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 6 The regional plan for the Centre de gestion intégrée prepared by Serrener Consultation inc. dated February This regional plan is part of Appendix F, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 7 The map titled Le patrimoine bâti taken from the Chapter of the Borough of Pierrefonds- Roxboro for the Master Plan. This map is part of Appendix G, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 8 The map titled Le patrimoine naturel taken from the chapter of the Borough of Pierrefonds-Roxboro for the Master Plan. This map is part of Appendix H, which forms an integral part of the present by-law. 9 Enhancement of a circulation aisle This plan is part of Appendix I, which does not form an integral part of the by-law. 10 Standards for landscaping or re-landscaping riverbanks. These sketches are incorporated into Appendix J, which forms an integral part of the present bylaw. 6. REPLACEMENT For all legal purposes, the by-law replaces the following by-laws and all their amendments: 1 By-law number 1047, titled Zoning By-law, adopted by the former Town of Pierrefonds. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

19 3 2 By-law Number , titled Zoning By-law, adopted by the former Town of Roxboro. 7. TABLES, GRAPHICS AND SYMBOLS Any table, graphic, symbol or other form of expression other than the text itself contained in the by-law or to which it makes reference, forms an integral part of this by-law. SECTION 2: GENERAL INTERPRTIVE PROVISIONS 8. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT All dimensions and measurements used in the present by-law are expressed in measurement units of the International System (IS). 9. RULES OF PRECEDENCE FOR THE PROVISIONS In the case of conflict within the by-law, unless otherwise indicated, the following rules apply: 1 In the case of conflict between the text and a title, the text takes precedence. 2 In the case of conflict between the text and any other form of expression, except for the specifications chart, the text takes precedence. 3 In the case of conflict between a datum in a table and in a graphic, the datum in the table takes precedence. 4 In the case of conflict between a specifications chart and the zoning plan, the chart takes precedence. 10. RULES OF PRECEDENCE FOR GENERAL AND SPECIFIC PROVISIONS In the case of incompatibility between two provisions in the by-law or between a provision in this by-law and a provision in another by-law, the specific provision takes precedence over the general provision. Unless otherwise indicated, in the case of incompatibility between restrictive or prohibitive provisions in the by-law, or in the case of incompatibility between a restrictive or prohibitive Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

20 4 provision in this by-law and a provision in another by-law, the most restrictive or prohibitive provision applies. 11. REFERENCES All references to other by-laws given in this by-law remain open, that is to say they extend to cover any modification, made after the coming into force of the by-law, to which the by-law may be subject. 12. BY-LAW STRUCTURE This by-law is divided into chapters using Arabic numerals. As needed, each chapter is divided into sections using Arabic numerals. The articles are numbered consecutively, using Arabic numerals. Each article is then divided into clauses. Clauses are not preceded by a number, letter or specific symbol. A clause may be further divided into paragraphs. A paragraph is numbered using Arabic numerals. A paragraph may be further divided into sub-paragraphs. A sub-paragraph is preceded by a lower-case letter. A subparagraph may be further divided into subsections. A subsection is preceded by a dash. The following example illustrates the general structural method used in the present by-law: CHAPTER 1 TEXT 1: CHAPTER SECTION 1 TEXT 2 SECTION 1. TEXT 3 ARTICLE Text 4 CLAUSE 1o Text 5 PARAGRAPH a) Text 6 SUB-PARAGRAPH - Text 7 SUBSECTION 13. TERMINOLOGY For the purposes of interpreting the present by-law, except where the context indicates a different meaning, any word or expression has the meaning given to it in Chapter 3 of the present by-law. Should a word or an expression not be specifically defined in this by-law, it is understood by its common meaning as defined in a dictionary. SECTION 3: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO DIVISION INTO ZONES Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

21 5 14. DIVISION OF THE TERRITORY INTO ZONES The Borough s territory is divided into zones that are outlined on the zoning plan. Each zone constitutes a voting unit for the purposes included in the Act respecting land-use planning & development (R.S.Q., c. A-19.1). 15. IDENTIFICATION OF ZONES Each zone outlined on the zoning plan is identified by a code letter indicating the main occupational use for the zone, as follows: Code Letter Main Occupational Use H C I P R E Housing Commercial Industrial Community Recreational Conservation Each zone is further identified by two series of numbers that follow the code letter. The first series of numbers indicates the planning unit in which the zone is located and refers to the sheet number for the zoning plan. The second series of numbers established the numerical order of the zones. Any zone identified by a unique combination of numbers and letters constitutes a zone distinct from, and independent of, any other zone. For example: H H: Main occupational use Housing 1: Planning unit 100: Numerical order of the zone 16. INTERPRETING THE ZONE BOUNDARIES ON THE ZONING PLAN A zone boundary shown on the zoning plan normally coincides with one of the following lines, such as this line as it existed on the date of coming into force of the by-law, or as it existed on the date on which a zone boundary was modified: 1 The median line or the extension of the median line of an existing or proposed road. 2 The median line of a watercourse or a body of water. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

22 6 3 The median line of an easement for a public service infrastructure. 4 The median line of an easement for a railway line. 5 A lot boundary line, a boundary of a piece of land or its extension. 6 A municipal or borough boundary line. When a zone boundary line does not coincide with one of the lines mentioned in paragraphs 1 to 6 of the first clause, a measurement must be taken at the same scale as the plan. However, a slight inconsistency between the route of a zone boundary and one of these lines must be interpreted, as far as possible, in favour of the rules of interpretation in the first clause. SECTION 4: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS CHARTS 17. GENERAL SCOPE OF THE SPECIFICATIONS CHARTS In addition to any other provision in the by-law, a specifications chart applies to each of the zones and contains specific provisions applicable to each zone. 18. RULES OF INTERPRETATION FOR THE SPECIFICATIONS CHART The following paragraphs set out the rules applicable for interpreting the specifications charts in Appendix A: 1 Zone The specifications chart includes an item called Zone for each zone, which identifies the zone concerned by means of a letter followed by a series of numbers that correspond to the main occupational use for the zone, followed by the number of the planning unit and by the order number of the zone. 2 Permitted Uses The specifications chart includes an item called Permitted Uses for each zone, which lists the main categories of use permitted in that zone, the main uses that are specifically excluded from that zone and the main uses that are specifically permitted. 3 Permitted Use Categories Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

23 7 The specifications chart includes an item called Permitted Use Category. An alphanumeric code appearing in the item called Permitted Use Category refers to the codes for the use categories defined in Chapter 4 of the present by-law. A code next to the item called Permitted Use Category signifies that all the uses in the corresponding use category are permitted in the zone, subject to the uses specifically excluded or specifically excluded. A use that is not part of a use category shown in this way is prohibited in the zone. 4 Use Specifically Excluded The specifications chart includes an item called Use Specifically Excluded. An alphanumeric or numeric code appearing in the item called Use Specifically Excluded refers to the use codes in the classification of uses in Chapter 4 or in the codification of main uses in Appendix B. This code may make reference to a sub-category of uses or to a use. A number in brackets appearing in the item called Use Specifically Excluded refers to the item called Notes in which an entry indicates the use sub-category or the use that is specifically excluded. When the item called Use Specifically Excluded refers to a use sub-category, all the uses in the use category to which this sub-category belongs are authorized, except for the uses that are part of the category of uses specifically excluded. When the item called Use Specifically Excluded refers to a use, all the uses in the use category to which this use belongs are authorized, except for a use that is specifically excluded. 5 Use Specifically Permitted The specifications chart includes an item called Use Specifically Permitted. An alphanumeric or numeric code appearing in the item called Use Specifically Permitted refers to the use codes in the classification of uses in Chapter 4 or in the codification of main uses in Appendix B. This code may make reference to a sub-category of uses or to a use. A number in brackets appearing in the item called Use Specifically Permitted refers to the item called Notes in which an entry indicates the use sub-category or the use that is specifically permitted. When the item called Use Specifically Permitted refers to a use sub-category, only the uses that are in this sub-category are authorized, excluding any use included in another use sub-category that belongs to the same use category. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

24 8 When the item called Use Specifically Permitted refers to a use, only this use is authorized, excluding all other uses in the use category in which the specific use is authorized. 6 Standards Prescribed (subdivisions) The specifications chart includes an item called Standards Prescribed (subdivisions) that contains the particular standards relative to the landsite and applicable in each zone. The specifications chart includes an item called Landsite that gives the minimum dimensions and area of a landsite occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the zone. A number in the line called min. area (m²) gives the minimum area of a landsite, in square metres, for a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min. depth (m) indicates the minimum depth of a landsite, in metres, for an authorized use in the same column. A number in the line called min. width (m) indicates the minimum width of a landsite, in metres, for an authorized use in the same column. 7 Standards Prescribed (zoning) The specifications chart includes an item called Standards Prescribed that contains the particular standards relative to a building, as well as various specific standards applicable in each zone. a) Structure The specifications chart includes an item called Structure that gives the types of building structures authorized in the zone. An asterisk (*) next to a type of structure listed under this item indicates that this structure is authorized for a main building destined for an authorized use in the same column. b) Setbacks Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

25 9 The specifications chart includes an item called Setbacks that gives setbacks applicable for a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a main use authorized in the zone. A number in the line called min. front (m) gives the minimum front setback, in metres, applicable to the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min. side (m) gives the minimum side setback, in metres, applicable to the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. The letter H indicates the height of the building in metres. A number in the line called min. rear (m) gives the minimum rear setback, in metres, applicable to the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. The letter H indicates the height of the building in metres. c) Building The specifications chart includes an item called Building that gives the minimum and maximum heights in storeys, the minimum and maximum heights in metres, the minimum footprint, the minimum floor area and the minimum width of the front façade of a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the zone. A number in the line called min./max. height (storeys), located to the left of the diagonal bar, gives the minimum number of storeys for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number on the line called min./max. height (storeys), located to the right of the diagonal bar, gives the maximum number of storeys for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min./max. height (m), located to the left of the diagonal bar, gives the minimum height in metres for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min./max. height (m), located to the right of the diagonal bar, gives the maximum height in metres for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

26 10 A number in the line called min. footprint (m²) gives the minimum footprint, in square metres, for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min. floor area (m²) gives the minimum total floor area, in square metres, for the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number in the line called min. width of front façade (m) gives the minimum width, in metres, of the main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. d) Ratios The specifications chart includes an item called Ratios that gives the minimum and maximum numbers of apartments or rooms per building, the minimum and maximum ratios between the total floor area and the landsite, and the minimum and maximum ratios between the built space and the landsite, for a building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the zone. A number on the line called min./max. apartment/building, located to the left of the diagonal bar, gives the minimum apartment/building ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number on the line called min./max. apartment/building, located to the right of the diagonal bar gives the maximum apartment/building ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. When the apartment/building ratio is applied to a use in the Collective housing (h4) use category, a single room is considered to be an apartment solely for the purpose of calculating this ratio. A number on the line called min./max. Ratio of Building Footprint to Site (BFS), located to the left of the diagonal bar, gives the minimum floor/landsite ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

27 11 authorized in the same column. A number on the line called min./max. Floor Area Ratio (FAR), located to the right of the diagonal bar, gives the maximum floor/landsite ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number on the line called min./max. Ratio of Building Footprint to Site (BFS), located to the left of the diagonal bar, gives the minimum built space/landsite ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. A number on the line called min./max. Ratio of Building Footprint to Site (BFS), located to the right of the diagonal bar, gives the maximum built space/landsite ratio applicable to a main building occupied or destined to be occupied by a use authorized in the same column. e) Other 8 Special Provisions The specifications chart includes an item called Other, indicating a special provision in regard to outdoor storage. A letter on the line called type of outdoor storage Article 0 gives the type of outdoor storage authorized, as described in Article 0 of the present by-law, for a use authorized in the same column. With the exception of a use in the Agricultural (a) group, when there is no letter in the line called type of outdoor storage Article 0, outdoor storage is not authorized for an authorized use in the same column. The specifications chart includes an item called Special Provisions indicating a special provision imposed on a use in addition to the general standards included in the present bylaw. An article number appearing in the Special Provisions makes reference to an article that includes the provision applicable to it. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

28 12 9 Notes A number in brackets appearing in the item called Special Provisions refers to the item called Notes in which an entry indicates the article that includes the provision applicable to it. The specifications chart includes an item called Notes that allows detailed information to be entered, by means of a reference from another item in the chart. A use or a sub-category of uses specifically excluded or specifically permitted may be identified in the item called Notes, by means of a reference from the item called Use Specifically Excluded or from the item called Use Specifically Permitted. An article or a series of articles decreeing a special provision may be shown in the item called Notes, by means of a reference from the item called Special Provisions. 19. MIXED-USE BUILDING When, in the specifications chart, several use categories are permitted in a zone, the uses in these categories may be exercised in the same building, subject to any provision in the by-law governing mixed use. In the case of incompatibility between the standards prescribed in the specifications chart, the following rules apply: 1 In the case where the uses authorized in the zone fall under different groups of uses, the following provisions apply: a) When a portion of the building is occupied by a main use in the Housing (h1) group, the standard for the group of uses for the main use that occupies the other portion of the building concerned must be applied for any standard included in the following items: Landsite, Structure, Setbacks, Building and Ratios. b) When the building is not occupied or is not destined to be occupied by a main use in the Housing (h1) group, the standard for the group of uses corresponding to the main occupational use for the zone in which the building is located must be Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

29 13 applied for any standard included in the following items: Landsite, Structure, Setbacks, Building and Ratios. 2 In the case where the uses authorized in the zone fall under different categories of use but are part of the same group of uses, the most restrictive standard among the corresponding standards prescribed for the uses concerned must be applied for any standard included in the following items: Landsite, Structure, Setbacks, Building and Ratios. In order to apply the present paragraph to a standard included in the item called Structure, the order for the types of structure is from the most restrictive to the least restrictive: detached, semi-detached, row housing. 3 Notwithstanding paragraph 1, for any standard included in the line called height in storeys and height in metres (m) in the item called Building, application of the least restrictive standard is authorized. 20. LANDSITE INCLUDED IN MORE THAN ONE ZONE In the case of incompatibility between the standards prescribed in the specifications chart for a landsite included in more than one zone, the following rules apply: 1 For any standard included in the item called Landsite, the most restrictive standard for the zones concerned applies. 2 In a case where a prescribed standard applies to a building: a) If the building is entirely located within a single zone, for any standard included in the following items: Structure, Setbacks, Building, Ratios, Other and Special Provisions, the standard for the zone in which the building is constructed must be applied. b) If the building is located in more than one zone, for any standard included in the following items: Structure, Setbacks, Building, Ratios, Other and Special Provisions, the most restrictive standard for the zones concerned must be applied. In order to apply the present sub-paragraph to a standard included in the item called Structure, the order for the types of structure is from the most restrictive to the least restrictive: detached, semi-detached, row housing. 3 The use for each portion of the landsite or each portion of the building must be in conformity with the uses permitted in the specifications chart for the zone in which the portion of the landsite or the portion of the building is located. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

30 14 4 The minimum dimensions and area of a landsite, the setbacks and the ratios must be measured or calculated in terms of the landsite boundaries, excluding the zone boundaries and the municipal boundaries. SECTION 5: INTERPRETIVE PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO USE CODES 21. RULES FOR INTERPRETING USE CODES The classification of uses in Chapter 4 of the present by-law uses a coding system for uses similar to that in the 2005 edition of the Manuel d évaluation foncière du Québec. All the codes for the classes of uses, the codes for the sub-classes of uses and the codes for uses used in the by-law are to be found in Appendix B. A code designating a class of uses, a sub-class of uses or a use, as well as the name given to a code, may differ from those in the 2005 edition of the Manuel d évaluation foncière du Québec. Finally, several of the codes in this manual are not used in the by-law. The detailed coding of the uses in Appendix B is categorized according to the number of numerals in the codes, as follows: Class of uses Sub-class of uses Uses Code with 2 numerals Code with 3 numerals Code with 4 numerals The detailed coding for uses in Appendix B must be used for interpreting the overall classification of the uses in Chapter 4. The following rules apply: 1 When the list of uses included in a sub-category of uses in Chapter 4 refers to a code with 2 numerals, any use listed in Appendix B for which the 4-numeral code begins with the same 2 numerals is included in the category or sub-category of uses. 2 When the list of uses included in a sub-category of uses in Chapter 4 refers to a code with 3 numerals, any use listed in Appendix B for which the 4-numeral code begins with the same 3 numerals is included in the category or sub-category of uses. 3 When the list of uses included in a sub-category of uses in Chapter 4 refers to a code with 4 numerals, only the corresponding special use is included in the category or sub-category of uses. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

31 15 In the case of incompatibility between the use code used in the by-law and its name, the name of the use takes precedence. In the case of incompatibility between the overall classification of the uses in Chapter 4 and the reference to the sub-category of uses listed in Appendix B, the overall classification takes precedence. In the case of incompatibility between the name of a use in the by-law and the name of a use in Appendix B, the name of the use in the by-law takes precedence. Interpretation of the use codes must take into account the remarks inserted in brackets following the name associated with the code and, as needed, the words or expressions defined in Chapter 3. In addition, the meaning and the scope of the use codes must be determined in terms of the logic behind the coding, and by interpreting the various codes as they relate to one another. Chapter 1: Declaratory and interpretive provisions

32 16 CHAPTER 2 ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 22. APPLICATION OF THE BY-LAW Application of the by-law is carried out by the designated official named according to the provisions of the by-law on permits and certificates (By-law 1051 for the Town of Pierrefonds and By-law for the Town of Roxboro). 23. POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE DESIGNATED OFFICIAL The powers and duties of the designated official are defined in the by-laws on permits and certificates (By-law 1051 for the Town of Pierrefonds and By-law for the Town of Roxboro). 24. VIOLATIONS, SANCTIONS, RECOURSE AND PROSECUTION The provisions related to a violation, a sanction, recourse or legal prosecution in regard to the bylaw are those set out in the by-laws on permits and certificates (By-law 1051 for the Town of Pierrefonds and By-law for the Town of Roxboro). Chapter 2 : Administrative provisions

33 17 CHAPTER 3 TERMINOLOGY 25. TERMINOLOGY For the interpretation of the planning regulations, the following words and expressions have the meanings attributed to them by the present article. STORAGE ENCLOSURE FOR WASTE MATERIAL CARPORT Closed structure, other than a building, intended for the temporary storage of garbage and recyclable materials between collections (example: container). Accessory building attached or not attached to the main building or to an accessory building, with a roof on pillars and with open sides, except for the side attached to another building. A carport is used to shelter a passenger vehicle. See also Accessory Building. TEMPORARY WINTER GARAGE Removable shelter, installed for a limited time period set by the zoning by-law, and used to shelter a passenger vehicle during the winter. TEMPORARY BOAT SHELTER Temporary shelter, without a crib, used to shelter a watercraft. A temporary boat shelter does not constitute a structure under the meaning of this by-law. COVERED FUELING AREA Canopy, attached or not attached to a building, to protect the clientele from intemperate weather during the refuelling of a vehicle s fuel tank. REMOVABLE SHELTER Chapter 3 : Terminology

34 Light structure, easily disassembled, made from fabricated tubular metal, covered with weatherproof, synthetic or plastic sheeting, to shelter an outdoor space or a vehicle, a piece of equipment, goods or other stored object, placed or parked in a yard. See also Accessory Building. WINTER SHELTER A temporary winter shelter in the form of a carport, doorway shelter or tunnel. WINTER DOORWAY SHELTER Removable shelter, installed for a limited time period set by the zoning by-law, and used to protect the entrance to a building from the wind, cold and snow accumulation. WINTER TUNNEL SHELTER Removable shelter, installed for a limited time period set by the zoning by-law, and used to protect a pedestrian passage, sidewalk or access ramp from the wind, cold and snow accumulation. LANDSITE ENTRANCE (Synonym: curb cut) Driveable entrance installed on the boundary of a street easement to allow the passage of a vehicle from the street onto a contiguous landsite. When the driveable portion of the street does not extend as far as the edge of the street easement, entrance to the landsite also includes the portion of the driveway entrance that extends from the edge of the street easement as far as the drivable portion of the street. 18 ENLARGEMENT Work to increase the area or the volume of a structure or an installation, to increase the area of a landsite or to increase the area occupied by a use. AGRICULTURE Chapter 3 : Terminology

35 Agriculture as meant in the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (R.S.Q., c. P-41.1). LEISURE AREA Designates an outdoor space for relaxation and leisure pursuits, located on a landsite occupied by a dwelling and for the exclusive use of the occupants of the dwelling. LOADING AREA Off-street space reserved for a delivery vehicle when loading or unloading merchandise. ENTRANCE AISLE Vehicular aisle between a landsite entrance and an off-street parking area or a manœuvering area in order to allow the vehicle access to the off-street parking area or the loading space, as the case may be. 19 CIRCULATION AISLE Aisle installed inside a parking area to allow a vehicle to circulate within the parking area and to access a parking space. Thus the expression circulation aisle designates both an aisle bordered by parking spaces and an aisle between rows of parking spaces. EXTERIOR LAYOUT AND LANDSCAPING Installation for creating the spatial configuration and structuring of a landsite, by means of the placement of materials and planting. Chapter 3 : Terminology

36 Without restricting the generality of the foregoing, the expression Exterior layout and landscaping designates in particular an access aisle, an entrance aisle, a landsite entrance (curb cut), a circulation aisle, an off-street parking area, a loading space, a pedestrian passage, a fence, a ditch, a backfill, a retaining wall and a leisure area. HOME ANTENNA Antenna used solely for the reception of radio waves, television waves or short waves for private purposes. MATURE TREE In the case of a deciduous tree, the tree is considered as being mature when it has a D.B.H of 10 cm and in the case of a conifer, the tree is considered as being mature when it reaches a height of 2 m. COMPETENT AUTHORITY AWNING The head of the Department of Urban Planning and Services to Businesses (Service de l aménagement urbain et des services aux enterprises) or his representatives authorized to act on his behalf. Small roof, not supported by columns or walls, installed projecting from a building, over an opening or a terrace, for the purpose of protection against intemperate weather and the sun. 20 FASCIA Portion of a roof that projects beyond the exterior façade of a wall of a building. ELECTRONIC BILLBOARD BALCONY Sign equipped with a device that allows the display of fixed or repeating messages in illuminated letters or images. M Open raised platform, covered by a roof or uncovered, connected to the ground by means of steps or a ramp, projecting from an exterior wall of a building, cantilevered or supported by posts or brackets, surrounded or not by a guardrail. Chapter 3 : Terminology

37 21 See also Veranda and Front Porch. (CA ; ) ENTRANCE AWNING BUILDING Canvas covering over a building entrance to protect against intemperate weather or the sun. Structure with a roof supported by columns and walls, whatever its use, housing or accommodating a person, an animal or a thing. ACCESSORY BUILDING M Building detached from a main building, built on the same landsite as the latter and occupied solely by an accessory use to the main use. (CA ; ) ATTACHED ACCESSORY BUILDING Accessory building contiguous with another accessory building or a main building, over a width of at least 3 m, by means of a wall, a roof, a canopy or a corridor. Chapter 3 : Terminology

38 22 DETACHED ACCESSORY BUILDING R (CA ; ). MODULAR BUILDING Building composed of one or more new prefabricated modules, certified in accordance with the applicable CSA standards and designed to be transported individually and be assembled on the final site for which they are intended. MAIN BUILDING Building occupied by one or more main uses authorized in the zone in which it is located, or by one or more main uses protected by acquired rights. CONTIGUOUS MAIN BUILDING Chapter 3 : Terminology

39 Main building forming part of a group of at least three main buildings attached to one another and having at least one side party wall over a depth of at least 5 m, measured from the main façade. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. ROWHOUSE MAIN BUILDING Synonym of Contiguous Main Building. END ROWHOUSE MAIN BUILDING Main building that is part of a row of contiguous buildings and is located at the end of this row. DETACHED MAIN BUILDING Main building detached from any other main building. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. SEMI-DETACHED MAIN BUILDING Main building attached to one other main building by a side party wall over a depth of at least 5 m measured from the main façade. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. LATERAL 3-TYPE MAIN BUILDING M Main building linked or not to another main building by an architectural element comprised of a party wall and a roof. This architectural element, when present, must be located on the side landsite boundary line linking the two properties. (CA ; ) TEMPORARY BUILDING CELLAR Building with no permanent foundation installed or erected for a special purpose and for a limited time period set by the zoning by-law. Storey of a building situated below the ground floor, in which at least half the height, measured from the floor to the finished ceiling or from the bottom of the joists of the floor above if the ceiling is unfinished, is below average exterior grade level, after the final grading. A cellar is not taken into account when calculating the number of storeys in a building. 23 Chapter 3 : Terminology

40 24 RETIREMENT HOME OR CURATIVE FACILITY A facility in which in-patient, out-patient or home-care services are offered for the lodging, maintenance, keeping under observation, treatment or social rehabilitation, as the case may be, of persons whose condition, by reason of their age or their physical, personality, psycho-social or family deficiencies, is such that they must be treated, kept in protected residence or, if need be, placed under confinement or be on home treatment, including a nursery, but excluding the following: a) A service for the provision of childcare within the meaning of the Act respecting childcare centres and childcare services (R.S.Q., c. C-8.2) foster families, vacation camps and other similar facilities; b) A facility maintained by a religious institution to receive its members or followers. CHANGE OF USE Constitutes a change of use as follows: a) Replacing the use for a landsite, or building, or part of either of these with another use, even if this use is included in the same sub-category of uses, the same category of uses or the same group; b) Beginning the exercise of a use on a landsite, in a building or a part of either of these which up until then had been vacant; FENCE c) Ceasing the exercise of a use on a landsite, in a building or part of either of these. Structure, whether shared or not, made up of posts and materials authorized in the zoning by-law, installed for the purpose of delineating, marking or closing in a space. SNOW FENCE Fence made of rough-sawn slats of wood, or of a similarly resistant material, fixed together with wires or polymer filament, or made of plastic snow fence material, installed for a limited time period n order to enclose a space or form a barrier against the wind and the drifting or accumulation of snow. Chapter 3 : Terminology

41 25 COVERAGE RATIO See Built space/landsite ratio". FLOOR AREA RATIO (F.A.R.) See Building footprint/landsite ratio. PLANNING ADVISORY COMMITTEE COUNCIL STRUCTURE The Planning Advisory Committee created by Borough by-law. The Borough Council of the Borough of Pierrefonds-Roxboro. Building, structure or other orderly installation resulting from the assembly of materials. Also designated is anything erected, built or constructed that requires a position on the ground or that is joined to anything that requires a position on the ground. N ACCESSORY STRUCTURE Structure attached to or detached from a main building, built on the same landsite as the latter and in which is exercised solely an accessory use to the main use, or, when permitted by the zoning by-law, an additional use to the main use. LATERAL ZERO STRUCTURE Structure whose sitting is located at a distance varying from 0 cm to 20 cm from the side landsite line. (CA ; ) TEMPORARY STRUCTURE Structure of a transient nature, intended for special purposes and for a limited time period set by the zoning by-law. ROOFTOP STRUCTURE Chapter 3 : Terminology

42 Structure erected on the roof or extending beyond the roof of a building, associated with or housing an element associated with, the functioning of the mechanical or electrical components of a building or with the exercise of an authorized use for the building, such as a water tank, mechanical equipment for the building, a shaft housing or elevator shaft housing, a stairwell entrance structure, a ventilation or light shaft, or communication equipment. CLEARCUTTING Felling of trees that is not aimed at making an installation or erecting a structure authorized in virtue of a by-law of the Borough of Pierrefonds-Roxboro and that involves the felling of all the trees contained inside a continuous perimeter surrounding an area of at least 60 m². SANITATION FELLING Tree felling that consists of selectively felling or harvesting trees that are weak, abnormal, withered, damaged or dead in a stand of trees. TREE FELLING Felling of one or more trees. 26 Chapter 3 : Terminology

43 27 COURTYARD Open-air space bounded by the wall of a building, its extension and the landsite line, or totally surrounded by the exterior walls of a building. REAR YARD Area of the landsite at the rear of a main building and delineated in terms of the characteristics of the landsite on which the main building is constructed. The rear yard is delineated by the rear landsite boundary line, the side landsite boundary lines, the rear wall of the main building and its rectilinear extension up to the side landsite boundary lines. See also Yard Diagrams. FRONT YARD Area of the landsite at the front of a main building and delineated in terms of the characteristics of the landsite on which the main building is constructed. The front yard is delineated by the front landsite boundary line, the side landsite boundary lines, the front wall of the main building and its rectilinear extension up to the side landsite boundary lines. See also Yard Diagrams. SIDE YARD Area of the landsite at the side of a main building in terms of the characteristics of the landsite on which the main building is constructed. The side yard is delineated by the side landsite boundary line, the side wall of the main building, the rectilinear extension of the front wall of the main building up to the side landsite boundary lines and the rectilinear extension of the rear wall of the main building up to the side landsite boundary lines. See also Yard Diagrams. WATERCOURSE Any mass of water that runs in a bed with a regular or intermittent flow, except for a ditch for a public thoroughfare, a party ditch or a drainage ditch. IRREVERSIBLE DIEBACK More than 50% of dead wood in the treetops. Chapter 3 : Terminology

44 28 D.B.H. Diameter at Breast Height. Abbreviation designating the diameter of the bole of a tree measured at a height of 1 m from grade level. HOME SCHOOL Teaching establishment run by an individual in a single-family dwelling that serves as his home. ELEMENTARY SCHOOL Teaching establishment for primary grades offering a program of courses spread over a sixyear period. The school may sometimes include classes for children of pre-school age. POLYVALENT SCHOOL Teaching establishment at the high school level offering a program of courses spread over a 5- year period. The school offers a long (5 years) high school course, a short high school course leading to vocational programs, and vocational programs. HIGH SCHOOL Teaching establishment at the high school level offering a study program with one or several years of courses. PRUNING Action of cutting twigs or branches of a tree in a precise manner. TRIMMING Operation that consists of removing a portion of the shoots to control the shape or growth of a tree. RIGHT OF WAY Area of a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a thoroughfare or infrastructure for a public service SIGN Any compilation of marks, symbols, letters, numerals or other characters, any image, drawing, engraving or other pictorial representation, any constant, intermittent, scrolling or otherwise mobile lighting assembly, any emblem, logo or other figure, any flag, Chapter 3 : Terminology

45 pennant or banner, any inflatable character or other volume as well as any other compilation, assembly or device, that meets the following three conditions: a) is attached to, stuck on, painted on, engraved on or otherwise installed on or fixed to, in a temporary or permanent fashion, a structure, part of a structure or a support of any kind, fixed or mobile; b) is used to inform, warn, announce, identify, advertise or draw attention to an establishment, a use, an activity, a project, a worksite, an event or a property; c) is installed on the exterior of a building or is visible from outside a building. FLASHING SIGN Sign in which the lighting or the illumination is intermittent or variable or that is equipped with a device or an accessory, such as a rotating light or strobe light, or an intermittent light, producing a mobile, intermittent or variable beam of light. Also considered as a flashing sign is a sign fitted with a series of bulbs, permanently lit, flashing or intermittent. SIGN WITH A VARIABLE MESSAGE Sign designed so that the message is modified periodically by the manual or automatic replacement of letters. WALL SIGN Sign placed so that surface that carries the inscription lies parallel to the surface of the portion of the building or portion of the structure to which it is fixed. 29 Chapter 3 : Terminology

46 30 COMMON SIGN Sign that refers to several businesses, establishments, offices for professional services, products, services or places of entertainment located, sold, provided or offered in the same building or on the same landsite as the one on which the sign is installed. COMMERCIAL SIGN Sign that refers to a business, establishment, office for professional service, product, service or place of entertainment located, sold, provided or offered in the same building or on the same landsite as the one on which the sign is installed. COMMUNITY SIGN Sign on which the message conveys information of a community nature or of public interest, with no reference to a product or service. IDENTIFICATION SIGN Sign indicating only the name, or as the case may be, the company name, and the address of the occupant of the building or the name and address of the building itself, as well as the use exercised in that building, without mentioning a product. DIRECTIONAL SIGN Sign that indicates the direction to follow to reach a destination identified on the sign and located on the same landsite as the sign. LUMINOUS SIGN Sign, a portion of a sign, its inscription or a portion of its inscription, illuminated using a luminescent, fluorescent or phosphorescent substance, for a «corps mésomorphe» or plasma element, including when such an element constitutes the sign or the inscription itself. Without limiting the scope of the preceding paragraph, the use of a neon tube, a cathode screen, a liquid crystal screen or a plasma screen is also considered as luminescent lighting. The fact to luminate a fluorescent tube to achieve a light reflection or lighting by translucence is not considered to be lighting by luminescence. SIGN ILLUMINATED BY REFLECTION Sign, or part of a sign, its inscription or part of its inscription, illuminated by the following means: a) sign with an external light source, with the beam directed onto the sign; Chapter 3 : Terminology

47 b) sign with an internal light source, the surfaces of which, except for the rear surface, are opaque with the beam directed to the exterior by reflecting off the rear surface of the sign. TRANSLUSCENT SIGN Sign, part of a sign, its inscription or part of its inscription, illuminated by a light source placed inside the sign, from which the beam of light is directed to the exterior through the translucent wall of the sign. OBLIQUE PROJECTING SIGN Sign placed so that the surface that carries the inscription is at an oblique angle to the surface of the portion of the building or structure to which it is affixed. PERPENDICULAR PROJECTING SIGN Sign placed so that the surface that carries the inscription is at a right angle to the surface of the portion of the building or structure to which it is affixed. WINDOW SIGN Sign installed inside the building and places so that the inscription is visible from the outside through an opening such as a door, a window or store window. ILLUMINATED SIGN Luminous sign, a sign lit by reflection or a translucent sign. 31 Chapter 3 : Terminology

48 32 ATTACHED SIGN Sign installed on a building or structure. Depending on the installation method permitted, an attached sign may also be installed inside the building. AWNING SIGN Sign with the inscription stuck, painted, engraved, silk-screened or otherwise placed on the canvas or the covering material of an awning. BANNER SIGN Sign with the inscription stuck, painted, engraved, silk-screened or otherwise placed on the fabric of a fixed or mobile banner. SIGN ON A LOW WALL Sign in the form of a box or individual characters, standing upright on or above a low wall separate from the building. Chapter 3 : Terminology

49 33 PYLON SIGN Sign attached, suspended or otherwise affixed to or supported by one or more posts or pylons anchored in the ground. PEDESTAL SIGN Sign with a base in the form of a large pedestal. Pylon sign where the space between the posts is infilled with a fixed or removable panel, or where the width of the post or posts represents 50% or more of the width of the sign is considered to be a pedestal sign. Chapter 3 : Terminology

50 34 SIGN ON GLAZING Sign where the inscription is stuck, painted, engraved or otherwise fixed, incorporated or applied to the glazing on a door, window or store window. ADVERTISING SIGN See Advertising Panel. TEMPORARY SIGN Sign not constructed so as to be permanent at the same location and that announces a special event for a limited time period. CURB CUT Synonym of Landsite Entrance. STORAGE Area for the storage of vehicles, merchandise, materials, objects, finished or semi-finished products resulting from or entering a manufacturing process, raw materials whether or not intended to be used in a manufacturing process or for any use whatsoever, carried out inside or outside the building. FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS Staircase completely open, made of incombustible materials, fixed to the outside of a building and installed exclusively to allow the evacuation of the occupants in the case of an emergency. EXTERIOR STAIRS Staircase, other than fire escape stairs, whether covered or not by a roof, fixed to the outside of the building as an integral part. Exterior stairs are open, but may be enclosed, in part, by a building wall if the access to the stairs remains open and not closed by a door or other means. Chapter 3 : Terminology

51 35 BERTH Space contiguous with a loading bay and reserved for parking a transportation vehicle when loading and unloading merchandise. OFF-STREET PARKING AREA Area for car parking established away from the easement for a street, with parking spaces and circulation aisles giving access to the spaces or rows of spaces. ESTABLISHMENT Premises for an agricultural, commercial or industrial business, or institutional, professional or public services in which the activities take place inside or outside the building, in conformity with the by-law in force. ESTABLISHMENT WITH RECEPTION OR BANQUET HALL Establishment in which the main activity consists of offering a service for on-site receptions and banquets and that may hold a meeting permit, issued or likely to be issued in virtue of the Act respecting liquor permits (R.S.Q., c. P9.1), authorizing the sale of alcoholic beverages for on-site consumption. ESTABLISHMENT WITH ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGE SERVICES Establishment in which the main activity consists of serving alcoholic beverages and that holds a permit, issued or likely to be issued in virtue of the Act respecting liquor permits (R.S.Q., c. P9.1), authorizing the sale of alcoholic beverages for on-site consumption without meal consumption. LARGE OR MEDIUM-SIZED ESTABLISHMENT Retail sales business with a total floor area of 4,000 m 2 or more, or a landsite on which are located several retail stores, each with a total floor area of 1,000 m 2 or more. Chapter 3 : Terminology

52 36 ESTABLISHMENT OFFERING BEVERAGE SERVICE AND VARIOUS ACTIVITIES Establishment that serves alcoholic beverages, including an establishment in which the main activity is dancing or a show bar, or an establishment that serves alcoholic beverages in which the main activity is dancing. STOREY Portion of a building between the upper surface of a floor and that of the floor immediately above, or in the absence of same, of the ceiling. The number of storeys in a building is calculated starting at the ground floor. OUTDOOR DISPLAY Temporary display, outside a building, of products displayed for retail sale or for rent. A product displayed on a pallet-type display is defined as being stored. STAND Small stand on the side of a road. FAÇADE Exterior face of any wall of a building exposed to the view. MAIN BUILDING FAÇADE In the case of an interior lot, designates the building façade that faces the street. In the case of a corner landsite, a through corner landsite, a through landsite or a landsite in the form of a block, it designates the building façade that faces the street to which the address of the building is attributed and on which the main entrance is found. When the building is placed at an oblique angle to the street, the building wall facing the street is that for which the angle with the line of the street easement is less than 45 o. Chapter 3 : Terminology

53 37 FOSTER FAMILY A foster family under the meaning of the Act respecting health services and social services (R.S.Q., c. S-4.2). DRAINAGE DITCH Long indentation in the ground, created by human intervention, and used for the sole purposes of draining to, and irrigating from, a drainage basin with an area of less than 100 hectares. PARTY (OR BOUNDARY) DITCH Long indentation in the ground solely for the purpose of draining two contiguous landsites. PUBLIC HIGHWAY (OR ROAD) DITCH Long indentation in the ground solely for the purpose of draining a public highway or road. DITCH Long indentation in the ground for the purpose of draining the soil or for surface water run-off from neighbouring landsites, except for a drainage ditch, a party ditch or a public highway ditch. GABION Wire cage made of corrosion-resistant metal, into which stones are deposited. GALLERY M Open raised platform, covered by a roof or uncovered, connected to the ground by means of steps or a ramp, projecting from an exterior wall of a building, cantilevered or supported by posts or brackets, surrounded or not by a guardrail. (CA ; ) See also Balcony and Front Porch. Chapter 3 : Terminology

54 38 PRIVATE GARAGE M M Accessory building, detached, that houses or is intended to house a passenger vehicle, erected on a landsite occupied by a dwelling. (CA ; ) PRIVATE GARAGE INCORPORATED OR ATTACHED TO A DWELLING A private garage that is incorporated or attached to a dwelling is an integral part of the main building and, unless otherwise indicated, it is not subject to the provisions applicable to an accessory building. It must be considered as part of the main building for the application of all provisions applicable to the main building. (CA ; ) TOURIST BED & BREAKFAST GAZEBO A B&B under the meaning of the Regulation respecting tourist accommodation establishments (R.Q., c. E-14.2, r. 1) that offers, among other things, inside a dwelling, at least 3 rooms for rent to transient guests, to whom breakfast served on the premises may also be offered. Small, open, seasonal shelter, permanent or temporary, with a roof, where one may eat or relax in the shade or under shelter and that is installed in a garden or in a courtyard. GATEHOUSE DWELLING Small accessory building to shelter a security guard for site surveillance, controlling access or payment of a toll or access fee. See also Accessory Building. Building, or part of a building, for housing a person and serving as his place of residence, consisting of one or more dwelling units. Chapter 3 : Terminology

55 39 TWO-FAMILY DWELLING Family-type dwelling consisting of 2 dwelling units with separate entrances to the outside, either directly or by means of a common vestibule or corridor. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. COLLECTIVE HOUSING Building consisting of individual rooms or apartments as well as the services offered collectively to the occupants of the rooms. These services must include at least a kitchen accessible to all occupants or food service on the premises, as well as coinoperated laundry facilities accessible to all occupants or a laundry service on the premises. Collective housing must have at least three rooms or apartments offered for rent. Collective housing is deemed supervised if the occupants have access on the premises to specialized care or aid services such as a nurse or nursing service, assistance with personal hygiene, feeding, household cleaning or a surveillance or assistance service in case of an emergency or an evacuation of the building. Collective housing that offers rooms for rent differs from accommodation services such as a hotel, inn or motel, by the fact that the rooms are occupied or are intended to be occupied as a place for permanent residence or as a home. MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING Building with 3 or more dwelling units with separate entrances to the outside, either directly or by means of a common vestibule or corridor. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. Chapter 3 : Terminology

56 40 THREE-FAMILY DWELLING Family-type dwelling with 3 dwelling units, each with separate entrances to the outside, either directly or by means of a common vestibule or corridor. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING Dwelling with a single dwelling unit. See also Diagram of Dwelling Structures. HEIGHT OF A BUILDING IN STOREYS See Storey. HEIGHT OF AN ACCESSORY BUILDING IN METRES Vertical distance between average grade level, after final grading, and the highest part of the roof assembly. HEIGHT OF A MAIN BUILDING IN METRES Vertical distance between the level of the centre line of the street measured from the mid-point of the landsite frontage after final levelling, and the highest level of the ceiling on the uppermost floor. HEIGHT OF A FENCE, WALL OR HEDGE Distance measured between the finished grade level, on the vertical of the fence, wall or hedge and the highest part of the fence, wall or hedge. When a minimum or maximum height is set, it applies to any point along the fence, wall or hedge. HEIGHT OF A SIGN Distance measured between the average natural grade level, on the vertical of the sign, and the highest point of the sign, including its support. Chapter 3 : Terminology

57 41 TREE-TOP (CROWN) BLOCK Portion of the tree above the trunk, consisting of branches, twigs and leaves. A landsite or series of lots, bordered on each side by a public thoroughfare. REAL ESTATE An area of land, as well as any structure or installation of a permanent nature on it, and everything on or in it that forms an integral part to the extent that this structure, this installation or everything that forms an integral part of the area of land, structure or installation is not moveable property under the meaning of the Quebec Civil Code (C.C.Q., 1991, c. 64). SEPTIC SYSTEM A system for collecting, disposing of or treating wastewater from a dwelling, such as water from a toilet, kitchen, bathroom, laundry room or any other appliance or installation apart from a toilet. Also designates a system for collecting, disposing of or treating wastewater from a non-residential building to the extent that the wastewater generated is of the same type as the wastewater from a dwelling. WIDTH OF THE BUILDING Distance between the side walls of a main building, measured along the main façade and including a private garage, measured at the foundation. REAR BOUNDARY LINE Landsite boundary line that is neither the front boundary line nor a side boundary line. See also Diagram of Lot Boundary Lines. Chapter 3 : Terminology

58 42 REAR BOUNDARY LINE ON A STREET Rear landsite boundary line that coincides with a street line. See also Diagram of Lot Boundary Lines. FRONT BOUNDARY LINE Boundary line that coincides with a street line along the main façade of the main building. See also Diagram of Lot Boundary Lines. LOT LINE Synonym of Landside Boundary Line. LANDSITE BOUNDARY LINE Rectilinear or non-rectilinear line of demarcation between two contiguous landsites or between a landsite and the street easement. STREET LINE Line of demarcation between a landsite and the street easement. SIDE BOUNDARY LINE Landsite boundary line that intersects with the front boundary line. See also Diagram of Lot Boundary Lines. SIDE BOUNDARY LINE ON A STREET Side boundary line that coincides with a street line. See also Diagram of Lot Boundary Lines. Chapter 3 : Terminology

59 43 HIGH WATER LINE Line that serves to delineate the riverbed and the bank of a lake or watercourse. The high water line is located on the natural line of high water determined in accordance with one of the following criteria and with the following order of precedence: 1. At the location where the predominance of aquatic plants ceases, and that of terrestrial plants starts, or if there are no aquatic plants, the line where the terrestrial plants cease in the direction of the body of water; 2. If there is a structure to hold back the water, at the highest elevation for exploitation of the hydraulic structure for the stretch of water upstream; 3. If there is a legally erected retaining wall, by the top of the structure; 4. If the information is available, the line of high water located at the flood limit recurring every 2 years, which is considered equivalent to the line established according to the botanical criteria listed in paragraph 1. RIVERBED/LAKEBED Portion of a watercourse or a lake extending from the high water line towards the centre of the body of water. DWELLING UNIT LOT Habitable space, consisting of one or more rooms, occupied by a single household, directly accessible from the outside or by means of a vestibule or corridor common to several dwellings, including full sanitary installations (toilet, washbasin and bathtub or shower) as well as the installations and areas needed for a person to be able to prepare a meal, eat and sleep. Area of land identified and delineated on an official cadastral plan drawn up, submitted and published in conformity with the Cadastre Act (R.S.Q., c. C-1) or with the Quebec Civil Code (C.C.Q., 1991, c. 64). Chapter 3 : Terminology

60 44 SERVICED LOT OR LAND Lot or land adjacent to a street, or to a lot, through which pass a municipal water supply pipe and a municipal sanitary sewer, or a lot or piece of land adjacent to a street or lot where a municipal by-law is in force ordering the installation of a municipal water supply pipe and a municipal sanitary sewer. UNSERVICED LOT OR LAND Lot or land that is not a serviced lot or piece of land, nor a partially serviced lot or piece of land. PARTIALLY SERVICED LOT OR LAND Lot or land adjacent to a street, or to a lot, through which passes either a municipal water supply pipe or a municipal sanitary sewer, or a lot or piece of land adjacent to a street or lot where a municipal by-law is in force ordering the installation of either a municipal water supply pipe or a municipal sanitary sewer. WATERSIDE LOT OR LAND MASONRY M Lot or land, one of the boundary lines of which coincides with the natural high water line of a lake or a body of water. Structural component consisting of bricks or stones of a minimum depth of 6 cm held together by a cement or mortar matrix. (CA ; ) CONVALESCENT HOME Establishment that offers temporary accommodation services and rehabilitation, psycho-social, nursing, pharmaceutical or medical services to allow people to regain their strength or their health after a hospital stay or after physical, psychological or emotional traumas. Chapter 3 : Terminology

61 45 TRANSITION HOUSE Establishment that offers temporary accommodation, accompaniment and support services to people returning to community life such as a former inmate or someone who has been admitted for close treatment. PUBLIC MARKET Public market authorized and governed by a by-law adopted in virtue of Article 9 of the Municipal Powers Act (R.S.Q., c. C-47.1). SETBACK ADJACENT TO A STREET A front or side setback on a street, or a rear setback when the rear boundary line coincides with a street line. REAR SETBACK Minimum prescribed distance between the rear boundary line and the main building. See also Diagram of Setbacks. FRONT SETBACKS Minimum or maximum prescribed distance between the front boundary line and the main building. See also Diagram of Setbacks. SIDE SETBACK Minimum prescribed distance between the side boundary line and the main building. See also Diagram of Setbacks. SIDE SETBACK ON A STREET Minimum or maximum prescribed distance between a side boundary line on a street and the main building. See also Diagram of Setbacks. Chapter 3 : Terminology

62 46 CANOPY MEZZANINE Roof-like structure cantilevered from a wall or supported on columns or posts. Intermediate floor surface installed between two floors of a building or between a floor and a ceiling when there is no floor above. A mezzanine must not be taken into account when calculating the number of storeys if its total area is no more than 10% of the floor area for the storey of which it is part or, when the space above the mezzanine floor has no visual obstructions more than 1070 mm above such floors, its total area is not more than 40% of the floor area for the storey of which it is part. When two or more mezzanines are installed above the same floor, the aggregate area of all the mezzanines must be taken into account as if they constituted a single element. MUNICIPALITY WALL City of Montreal, Borough of Pierrefonds-Roxboro. Vertical structure that encloses a space and that may also bear the load of a floor or a roof. REAR WALL Exterior wall of a building, parallel or approximately parallel to the rear boundary line of a landsite; the line of the wall may be broken. FRONT WALL Exterior wall of a building, parallel or approximately parallel to the front boundary line of a landsite; the line of the wall may be broken. Chapter 3 : Terminology

63 47 RETAINING WALL SIDE WALL Structure that rises vertically or at an angle over a certain length, installed for the purpose of resisting the force exerted by backfill material placed behind it, by the natural ground, by waves or by other factors likely to cause the ground to move. Exterior wall of a building, parallel or approximately parallel to the side boundary line of a landsite; the line of the wall may be broken. PARTY WALL Wall of a building erected on a landsite line and separating two buildings. AVERAGE GRADE LEVEL The lowest of the average definitive grade levels, measured at a distance of 3 m from a structure along each exterior wall of this structure. Localized depressions, such as vehicular or pedestrian entrances, do not need to be considered when calculating the average grade. CADASTRAL OPERATION WORKS An operation described in Article 3043 of the Quebec Civil Code (C.C.Q., 1991, c. 64). Human intervention modifying the original state of the site or premises. ADVERTISING PANEL Sign referring to a business, a profession, a product, a service or an entertainment exercised, sold or offered on a landsite other than the one on which the sign is located. PEDESTRIAN PATH Path reserved exclusively for pedestrians on a thoroughfare or between private landsites. Chapter 3 : Terminology

64 48 SUMMERHOUSE PERGOLA RIPRAP Small accessory shelter for seasonal use, of light construction and materials, with no insulation, glazed or screened, and installed for outdoor leisure activities. Light post-and-beam structure supporting an open slat roof, with open sides or clad in latticework, generally constructed so as to allow plants to climb up and over the structure or to create shade. Heavy rock placed on the edge of a lake or watercourse to prevent erosion. FRONT PORCH Entranceway composed of steps leading up to a platform on the same level as the entrance to the building and generally giving substance to the building. See also balcony and Veranda. SWIMMING POOL Indoor or outdoor basin, at least 60 cm deep, than can be filled or emptied as needed, and designed for swimming or aquatic activities. FLOOD PLAIN Space occupied by a lake or a watercourse during times of flooding. The flood plain corresponds to the geographic extent of the flooded areas, identified by a boundary or flood line on one of the plans for flood risk zones in Appendix E, which forms an integral part of the Zoning By-law. AQUATIC PLANTS Hydrophytic plants, including submergent, floating and emergent plants, and emergent herbaceous and woody plants characteristic of open marshes and swamps on bodies of water. Chapter 3 : Terminology

65 49 MANŒUVERING AREA Open, off-street space, contiguous with a loading space, reserved for manœuvering a goods vehicle towards and away from a loading space. FIRST FLOOR Synonym of Ground Floor. INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL PROJECT Group of commercial buildings characterized by the installation, on the same landsite, of at least 2 main buildings housing establishments in the Commercial (c) group, designed as a harmonious group, with private off-street parking used in common by the various establishments; the project may or may not include commodities, on the site, intended for the occupants or for the clientele; the planning and implementation of the project are part of a separate initiative, but management may be shared amongst multiple owners. INTEGRATED HOUSING PROJECT Group of residential buildings located on the same landsite and characterized by common design and development. LOADING BAY Indoor or outdoor platform, covered or uncovered, raised to allow loading and unloading at the level of a vehicle transporting merchandise. BUILT SPACE/LANDSITE RATIO Quotient obtained by dividing the footprint total of all the main buildings erected on the same landsite by the area of that landsite. DWELLING UNIT/BUILDING RATIO Numeral indicating the number of dwelling units, rooms or lodging units, depending on the applicable use, that may be installed in a main building. An additional dwelling unit is not taken into account when calculating the dwelling unit/building ratio. Chapter 3 : Terminology

66 50 BUILDING FOOTPRINT/LANDSITE RATIO Quotient obtained by dividing the total floor area of the main building erected on a landsite by the area of that landsite. BACKFILLING Earth moving to spread or move materials, from the site itself or from elsewhere, to form an embankment, fill a cavity or for grading. EMBANKMENT Earth brought in from the work site or from elsewhere to increase the elevation of land or to fill in a hollow. VEHICLE/EQUIPMENT STORAGE Temporary storing or parking, indoors or outdoors, of a vehicle used by an occupant of a dwelling unit or used by the staff of an establishment in the course of the normal activities of that establishment. Storing, indoors or outdoors, of a piece of equipment or machinery used by the staff of an establishment in the course of the normal activities of that establishment. Without limiting the scope of the first clause, the outdoor parking of a recreational vehicle belonging to the occupant of a dwelling unit and the outdoor parking of a vehicle used by the staff of an establishment in the course of its activities, such as a delivery vehicle used by a store or transportation company or a fleet of rental vehicles associated with a car rental business, constitutes this type of storage. FOSTER HOME A foster home under the meaning in the Act respecting health services and social services (R.S.Q., c. S-4.2). TOURIST HOME Chapter 3 : Terminology

67 A tourist home under the meaning in the Regulation respecting tourist accommodation establishments (R.Q., c. E-14.2, r. 1). Without restricting the scope of the preceding clause, a tourist home offers transient guests accommodation available only in the form of an apartment, an individual house or an individual cottage, furnished and with kitchen facilities. INTERMEDIARY RESOURCE An intermediary resource under the meaning in the Act respecting health services and social services (R.S.Q., c. S-4.2). GROUND FLOOR M Storey that is not a basement or cellar and in which the floor is no more than 2 m above the level of the street centre. (CA ; ) RIVER BANK A strip of land bordering a watercourse or a lake, and which stretches from the highwater line towards the interior of the landsite or lands over a distance set by the Zoning By-law. TENT-TRAILER Any camping vehicle referred to in the CAN/CSA-Z240 VC, series F99 standard drawn up by the Canadian Standards Association, whether or not it conforms to this standard. For information purposes, this standard normally refers to a motor home, a camper van, a caravan, a folding tent-trailer and a fifth-wheel trailer. A tent-trailer is designed to be used on a seasonal basis for recreational purposes, is equipped for sleeping and eating, and may be equipped with sanitary installations or equipment for food preparation. 51 Chapter 3 : Terminology

68 52 STREET Thoroughfare intended mainly for passenger vehicle traffic. PRIVATE ROAD Any road that is not a public road. PUBLIC ROAD Road belonging to the Municipality and declared open as a public road or street under the jurisdiction of the Ministre des Transports du Québec. PROJECTION Portion of a building that projects beyond the general line of the wall of a building. Without limiting the scope of the preceding sentence, a front entrance porch, a cornice, eaves, a balcony, a portico, a revolving door, a porch, a canopy, an awning, a sign, an exterior staircase, a veranda, a bay window and an overhanging wall constitute projections. NIGHT-TIME OR DAYTIME DANCE HALLS Establishment with no liquor permit, occupied or used mainly for dancing, which may be open beyond the hours of operation set out in the Act respecting liquor permits (R.S.Q., c. P-9.1) and in which the sale of non-alcoholic beverages for consumption on the premises is authorized. Chapter 3 : Terminology

69 53 YARD DIAGRAMS Chapter 3 : Terminology

70 54 LINE DIAGRAMS Chapter 3 : Terminology

71 55 SETBACK DIAGRAMS Chapter 3 : Terminology

72 56 DWELLING STRUCTURE DIAGRAMS Chapter 3 : Terminology

73 57 LANDSITES DIAGRAMS DOMESTIC GREENHOUSE Accessory building in which the walls and roof are mainly made of a material that allows light to penetrate, for the purpose of growing plants, fruits and vegetables intended for personal consumption by the producer and not for sale. COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE Accessory building in which the walls and roof are mainly made of a material that allows light to penetrate, and in which at least 80% of the outside perimeter consists of glazed openings for the growing of plants, fruits and vegetables intended for retail sale and related products (fertilizers, growing media, etc.). Chapter 3 : Terminology

74 58 STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE A stop-over centre for childcare under the meaning in the Act respecting childcare centres and childcare services (R.S.Q., c. C-8.2). HOME CHILDCARE SERVICE A home childcare service under the meaning of the Act respecting childcare centres and childcare services (R.S.Q., c. C-8.2). DAYCARE SERVICE A daycare, a childcare centre or a nursery school under the meaning of the Act respecting childcare centres and childcare services (R.S.Q., c. C-8.2) as well as a childcare service provided at school under the meaning of the Education Act (R.S.Q., c. I-13.3) or of the Act respecting private education (R.S.Q., c. E-9.1). PUBLIC SERVICE SOLARIUM BASEMENT Distribution network for electrical power, natural gas, telephone, telecommunications, water supply and sewer system, including a building or a structure necessary to ensure operation of the network. Habitable room that forms part of the main building, installed to take advantage of sunlight, in which at least 80% or the exterior perimeter consists of glazed openings. A glazed atrium is considered a solarium under the meaning of the present by-law. Storey of a building that is below the ground floor, partially underground, in which at least half the height, measured from the floor to the finished ceiling or to the underside of the joists of the floor above if the ceiling is not finished, is located above the average grade level on the exterior, after final grading. A basement is not taken into account when calculating the number of storeys in a building. Chapter 3 : Terminology

75 59 GROSS FLOOR AREA Area of a floor in a building measured to the outer edge of exterior walls or to the centre line of party walls. LEASABLE FLOOR AREA The leasable floor area is the result obtained by subtracting, from the total floor area, the floor area occupied by an indoor mall, a technical area (heating, electrical room, valve room) or a common public space (washrooms, locker room, infant care station, nursery room, daycare for the exclusive use of the clientele, parcel room, etc.). BUILDING FOOTPRINT Area of the surface delineated by the vertical projection of a building onto the ground, including a porch, a covered deck, a light well or an air shaft, but excluding a patio, a veranda, a balcony, an outdoor staircase, an outdoor ramp, eaves and an outdoor loading bay. TOTAL FLOOR AREA LANDSITE Sum of the gross area of each of the floors in the building, including the floor area of a basement but excluding the floor area of a cellar. For the purposes of calculating a minimum density, excluded from the calculation are spaces used for mechanical purposes (technical room), basement storage spaces and the floor area used for basement and semi-basement parking. Area of land in one piece, belonging to an owner or co-owned undivided, consisting of one or more lots or parts of lots. CORNER LANDSITE Landsite located at the intersection of two streets, for which the angle of intersection is less than 135 degrees, or located on a stretch of street that describes an arc subtended by an angle of less than 135 degrees. See also Lots Diagram. Chapter 3 : Terminology

76 60 CORNER THROUGH LANDSITE Landsite with a façade facing three streets. See also Lots Diagram. SERVICED LANDSITE See Serviced Lot or Land. PARKING LOT FOR CARS Use constituted by off-street, parking spaces, above-ground, underground or multistorey, intended for the general public and managed or operated by a profit-making or non-profit-making organization or by an individual, whether or not payment is required. INTERIOR LANDSITE Landsite with frontage on a single street. See also Lot Diagrams. UNSERVICED LANDSITE See Unserviced Lot or Land. PARTIALLY SERVICED LANDSITE See Partially Serviced Lot or Land. THROUGH LANDSITE PATIO Landsite bordered by two streets located on the opposite sides of the landsite. See also Lot Diagrams. Outdoor surface, installed on the ground or raised above the ground, generally comprising a wooden floor, a concrete slab floor cast on site or concrete pavers or slabs, and used mainly for leisure, sunbathing or outdoor dining. Chapter 3 : Terminology

77 61 RESTAURANT TERRACE/PATIO FLAT ROOF Terrace or patio installed for customers of a commercial establishment to consume their meals or beverages outdoors. Roof with a slope of less than 3 : 12 over more than 25% of its surface measured in horizontal projection. BACKFILLING WORK See Backfilling BICYCLE PARKING UNIT USE Space laid out specifically for parking a single bicycle. Purpose for which a landsite or part of a landsite, a structure or part of a structure is or may be used or occupied. ACCESSORY USE Use related to the main use, ancillary to that use and helping to improve the usefulness, convenience and attractiveness of the main use. ADDITIONAL USE Purpose for which a building, a structure or a landsite, or a part of any of these, is or may be used or occupied in addition to a main use. DEPENDENT USE Purpose for which a building, a structure or a landsite, or a part of any of these, is or may be used or occupied in a dependent manner to a main use: operations for the dependent use and the main use are exercised simultaneously. Chapter 3 : Terminology

78 62 MAIN USE Primary purpose for which a building, a structure, a landsite or a part of any of these is or is intended to be used. TEMPORARY USE Use authorized for a limited time period set by the Zoning By-law. PUBLIC UTILITY See Public Service. TOOL VEHICLE A road vehicle, designed mainly for carrying out work, and permanently equipped with tools for this purpose. RECREATIONAL VEHICLE VERANDA An off-road vehicle under the meaning of the Highway Safety Code (R.S.Q., c. C-24.2) and any other vehicle, motorized or not, designed to be used for recreational purposes, such as a pleasure boat, a personal watercraft, a tent-trailer, a snowmobile, a trailer, an all-terrain vehicle, a watercraft or any other similar vehicle. Platform covered by a roof, on which the exterior walls are screened or glazed, except for the structural support elements and any low wall, with a maximum height of 0.75 m, placed at the base of these walls. In no case does a covered deck constitute a solarium or a habitable room. SERVICE SPACE Space provided in a building for concealing technical installations such as garbage chutes, conduits, plumbing pipes, ducts and cables, or to facilitate their installation. Chapter 3 : Terminology

79 63 THOROUGHFARE Area of land or installation intended for vehicular and pedestrian traffic, including related installations such as a shoulder, a berm, a drainage ditch or infrastructure. Without limiting the scope of the preceding clause, the expression Thoroughfare designates in particular a road, a street, a lane, a sidewalk, a footpath, a bike path, a snowmobile trail and a hiking trail. PERMANENT AGRICULTURAL ZONE The territory included, by order of, or by a decision from, the Commission de protection du territoire agricole, in the agricultural zone established in virtue of the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (R.S.Q., c. P- 41.1). LOW-FLOW ZONE ( YEARS) Area of the flood plain, outside the boundary of the high-flow zone, which may flood during a flood that occurs every 100 years. HIGH-FLOW ZONE (0-20 YEARS) WETLAND Area of the flood plain that may flood during a flood that occurs every 20 years. Poorly drained, spongy, wet area of land, waterlogged or partially covered by shallow water, comparatively full and comparatively permanent, uncultivated, and in which the soil is mostly organic matter. Chapter 3 : Terminology

80 64 CHAPTER 4 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE CLASSIFICATION OF MAIN LAND USES SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS 26. USE GROUPS For the purposes of the by-law, the main uses are listed under six groups: 1 Housing (h). 2 Commercial (c). 3 Industrial (i). 4 Community (p). 5 Recreational (r). 6 Agricultural (a). 7 Conservation (e). 27. REFERENCE TO THE USES The provisions in the planning regulations and in the specifications chart refer to: 1 A group of uses, a category of uses, a sub-category of uses of a specific use, including the alphanumeric or numeric code associated with each, listed in sections 2 to 7 of the present chapter. 2 A class of uses, a sub-class of uses and a specific use, including the numeric code associated with each, listed in Appendix B of the present by-law. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

81 EXCLUSIVITY OF THE GROUPS, CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES OF USES The groups, categories and sub-categories of uses are exclusive. In exceptional cases where the same use is specifically mentioned in more than one sub-category of uses, there is the same use is specifically mentioned in more than one sub-category of uses, there is then a distinction made based on the characteristics of exercising the use so that the use concerned may only be associated with the sub-category in which the prescribed requirements are met. 29. SCOPE OF THE LISTING OF USES When a sub-category of uses includes a list of uses, this list is limitative. When a specific use is not mentioned in any sub-category, it needs to be associated with a subcategory, by taking into account its nature and the characteristics established for the sub-category concerned. SECTION 2: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 30. USE CATEGORIES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP The Housing (h) group includes 4 use categories of a similar nature. 31. SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) The Single-family Dwelling (h1) use category authorizes only dwellings with a single dwelling unit, with the exception of mobile homes. 32. TWO-FAMILY AND THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) The Two-family and Three-family Dwelling (h2) use category authorizes only dwellings with two or three dwelling units. In a two-family or three-family dwelling, an extra dwelling unit may be installed in the basement. 33. MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) The Multi-family Dwelling (h3) use category authorizes only dwellings with four or more dwelling units. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

82 COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4) The Collective Housing (h4) use category authorizes only collective, supervised or nonsupervised dwelling units and consists of individual rooms or apartments. SECTION 3: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP 35. USE CATEGORIES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP The Commercial (c) group includes 5 use categories similar in terms of their nature, the land use, the construction and the occupation of the building and their impacts on the surrounding environment. 36. RETAIL SALES AND SERVICES (C1) 1 The Retail Sales and Services (c1) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the retail sale of a product or the sale of a service. b) In addition to a service specifically mentioned in sub-paragraph b) of paragraph g) of the present article, the use may also relate to services for the maintenance, repair or rental of dry goods for which retail sale is mentioned in sub-paragraph a) of paragraph 2 in the present article. c) All operations are carried out inside a building with the exception of an accessory or temporary use specifically authorized outdoors by the by-law. d) The use does not cause any smoke, except that produced by the heating system, or any dust, odour, heat, gas, flashing light or vibration that may be perceptible outside the building. e) The use does not cause any noise more intense than the average ambient noise level, measured at the landsite boundaries. f) The use is not of a sexual nature. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

83 67 2 The Retail Sales and Services (c1) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) The retail sale of food products and dry goods (c1a), including only the uses under the following codes: 503 On-line shopping and mail-order business; 522 Retail sale of plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning and fireplace equipment; 523 Retail sale of paint, glass and wallpaper; 524 Retail sale of electrical material and lighting fixtures; 5251 Retail sale of hardware; 5253 Retail sale of locks, keys and accessories; 5312 Retail sale of household and auto supplies; 534 Retail sale by automatic dispensing machine; 539 Retail sale of other general merchandise (except for the use 5395-Retail sale of recuperated materials (demolition) ); 54 Retail sale of food products (except for the use 5450 Retail sale of dairy products (dairy bar) and the use 5432-Public Market ); 5596 Retail sale of lawnmowers, leaf and snow blowers and their accessories; 56 Retail sale of clothing and accessories; 57 Retail sale of furniture, home furnishings and appliances; 591 Retail sale of prescription and non-prescription drugs, personal care items and various related items; 592 Retail sale of alcoholic beverages and articles for their manufacture; 593 Retail sale of antiques and used goods; 594 Retail sale of books, stationery, pictures and frames; 595 Retail sale of sports articles, hunting and fishing accessories, bicycles and toys; 5965 Retail sale of household pets (pet store); 597 Retail sale of jewellery, coins and stamps (for collection); 5991 Retail sale of flowers (florist); 5992 Retail sale of funerary monuments and tombstones; 5993 Retail sale of tobacco products, newspapers, magazines and various articles (tobacconist); Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

84 Retail sale of cameras and photography items (except for photographic services, which are included under code 622); 5995 Retail sale of gifts, souvenirs and various objects; 5996 Retail sale of optical supplies (glasses, lenses, frames); 5997 Retail sale of orthopedic supplies; 5998 Retail sale of luggage and leather goods; 5999 Other retail sale activities. b) A professional, business (including associations), personal, financial or communication service, as well as a maintenance, repair or rental service for various products, (c1b), including only the uses listed under the following codes: 152 Housing for organized groups; 4291 Transportation by taxi; 4292 Ambulance service; 4293 Limousine service; 4711 Telephone exchange; 472 Telegraph communication, station and network; 473 Radio communication and broadcast (except for the use 4732-Station and transmission tower for radio ); 474 Television communication, station and network (except for the use 4742-Station and transmission tower for television ); 475 Radio and television broadcast station and network (combined system); 476 Sound recording studio; 479 Other communication stations and networks; 4924 Transportation ticket sales; 61 Finance, insurance and real estate services (except for the use 6123 Pawnbroker ); 6211 Laundry, dry cleaning and dyeing services (except for carpet cleaning and industrial laundry services, which come under codes 6215 and 6212 respectively); 6213 Diaper service; 6214 Laundry and dry-cleaning services (self-service); 6215 Carpet cleaning and repair services; 622 Photographic service; 623 Beauty, hair and other salons; 6241 Funeral home; 6244 Crematorium; Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

85 Other funeral services; 625 Services for the repair or modification of personal accessories and shoe repair; 6263 Pet grooming service; 629 Other personal services; 631 Advertising service; 632 Credit and collection services for businesses and consumers; 633 Reproduction, direct mail advertising, typing and answering services; 6341 Window-cleaning service; 6342 Extermination and disinfection services; 6343 Domestic cleaning service; 6351 Movie, video game and audio-visual material rental services; 638 Secretarial, translation and word processing services; 6392 Administration and business management consultancy services; 6393 Protection and private investigation services (including armoured cars); 6395 Travel and tour agency; 6399 Other business services; 6422 Repair services for radios, televisions and electronic equipment; 6439 Repair service for other light vehicles (non-motorized vehicles only); 6493 Repair service for watches, clocks and jewellery; 6496 Repair and maintenance services for computer hardware; 6497 Sharpening service for household articles; 6499 Other repair services; 651 Medical and health care services (except the uses 6513-Hospital Services and 6516-Sanatorium, convalescent home and rest home ); 652 Legal services; 6541 Childcare services; 655 Computer services; 656 Paramedic services; 657 Therapeutic services; 659 Other professional services; 6616 Service for estimating property damage (claims adjuster); 673 Postal services; 676 International organization and other extraterritorial organizations; 683 Specialized training (except for the use 6835 Dance school ); Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

86 Business association; 6992 Association of people exercising the same profession or activity; 6993 Trade union or similar organization; 6994 Civic, social or fraternal association; 6995 Laboratory services other than medical; 6999 Other diverse services; 8292 Agronomic services. 37. COMMERCIAL ENTERTAINMENT, LODGING AND FOOD SERVICES (C2) 1 The Commercial entertainment, lodging and food services (c2) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: b) The use relates to the serving or the sale of food, beverages and meals prepared on the premises, and to carrying out activities related to entertainment or to sport or to the accommodation of transient guests. c) All the operations are carried out inside a building, with the exception of outdoor activities specifically mentioned in paragraph 2 of the present article. d) Operations may involve late evening and night-time activities. e) Attendance for the use may generate sporadic inconveniences related to major car traffic movements. f) The use does not cause any smoke, except that produced by the heating system, or any dust, odour, heat, gas, flashing light or vibration that may be perceptible outside the building. g) The use does not cause any noise more intense than the average ambient noise level, measured at the landsite boundaries. h) The use is not of a sexual nature. 2 The Commercial entertainment, lodging and food services (c2) use category includes, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of use, insofar as the uses meet the requirements in paragraph 1 : Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

87 71 a) Intensive commercial entertainment (c2a), including only the following uses: 6835 Dance school (excluding a ballroom under code 5822); 7392 Miniature golf (indoor or outdoor); 7395 Amusement arcade (including video games, games played on the Internet and pinball machines); 7396 Poolroom; 7399 Other places of amusement (indoor premises) (excluding a ballroom under code 5822); 7413 Indoor squash, racquetball and tennis courts; 7415 Roller-skating rink; 7417 Bowling alley; 7425 Gym and athletic training (including, in particular a sports school); 7432 Indoor swimming pool and related activities; 7452 Curling club; 7459 Other ice-surface activities (indoor and outdoor); 7512 Health centre (including saunas, spas and therapeutic or Turkish baths); 792 Lottery and games of chance. b) Commercial entertainment with an assembly area (c2b), including only the uses under the following code: 721 Gathering for leisure activities c) Accommodation and conference services (c2c), including only the uses under the following codes: 583 Lodging establishment; 7233 Meeting room, conference and convention centre. d) Food service (c2d), including only the uses under the following codes: 5450 Retail sale of dairy products (dairy bar); 581 Full or limited food service (except for the use 5815 Establishment with reception or banquet hall ); 589 Other specialty food services. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

88 AUTOMOBILE SERVICES (C3) 1 The Automobile Services (c3) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use related to the retail sale of goods or products or to the sale of services associated with a car or a recreational vehicle. b) All operations are carried out inside a building, except for the dispensing of fuel or an accessory or temporary use specifically authorized for outdoors by the bylaw. c) The use does not cause any smoke, except that produced by the heating system, or any dust, odour, heat, gas, flashing light or vibration that may be perceptible outside the building. d) The use does not cause any noise more intense than the average ambient noise level, measured at the landsite boundaries. e) The use is not of a sexual nature. 2 The Automobile Services (c3) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 553 Service station (except for the use Service station with automobile repair ). b) Services for cars or for recreational vehicles (c3b), except for heavy vehicles, that include only the uses under the following codes: 552 Retail sale of tires, batteries and accessories; 5531 Service station with car repairs; 5593 Retail sale of used car parts and accessories; Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

89 Car repair services (except the uses 6413 Body work and car painting services and 6417-Heavy vehicle washing service (including bus) ); 6431 Light motorized vehicle repair services (motorcycle, snowmobile, allterrain vehicle). c) Rental and retail sale services for cars or recreational vehicles, except for heavy vehicles (c3c), that include only the uses under the following codes: 551 Retail sale of motor vehicles; 5591 Retail sale of watercraft and accessories; 5594 Retail sale of motorcycles, snowmobiles and their accessories; 5595 Retail sale of recreational vehicles and touring trailers; 6353 Car rental services; 6355 Rental services for trucks, utility trailers and recreational vehicles. 39. DISTINCTIVE BUSINESSES AND SERVICES (C4) 1 The Distinctive businesses and services (c4) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the sale of goods or products or to the sale of a service. b) All the operations are carried out inside a building, with the exception of Public Market (5432) or an accessory or temporary use specifically authorized for outdoors by the by-law. c) Operations may involve late evening and night-time activities. d) Attendance for the use may generate sporadic inconveniences related to major car traffic movements. e) The use does not cause any smoke, except that produced by the heating system, or any dust, odour, heat, gas, flashing light or vibration that may be perceptible outside the building. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

90 74 f) The use does not cause any noise more intense than the average ambient noise level, measured at the landsite boundaries. g) The activities and the frequency of use have repulsive effects, whether mutual or not, in regard to neighbouring activities, in particular in relation to uses in the Housing (h) group and to certain uses in the Commercial (c) and Community (p) groups. 2 The Distinctive businesses and services (c4) use category includes, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of use, insofar as the uses meet the requirements in paragraph 1 : a) A credit for warranty service (c4a), which includes only the following use: 6123 Pawnbroker. b) Licensed establishments and dance halls (c4b), that include only the uses under the following codes: 5815 Establishment with reception or banquet hall; 582 Establishment serving alcoholic beverages and offering various activities. c) A business or service of a sexual nature (c4c) including the uses listed in the present section and in which the operations consist mainly of: Exploiting the nude bodies of people, either the breasts in the case of a female or the genital area in the case of a male or a female, actually on the premises; Exploiting the nude bodies of people, either the breasts in the case of a female or the genital area in the case of a male or a female, by the presentation of films or audiovisual material on which the rating appears with the advisory explicit sexuality ; Promoting sexual relations amongst people through the intermediary of a civic, social or fraternal association or through a service. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

91 75 d) A daytime or night-time dance hall (c4d), which includes only the uses under the following code: 986 Daytime or night-time dance hall. e) A retail sales establishment for used merchandise or a public market (c4e), which includes only the uses under the following codes: 5332 Retail sale of used merchandise and flea market; 5932 Retail sale of used merchandise; 5432 Public market. 40. HEAVY ARTERIAL COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES, WHOLESALE BUSINESSES AND PARA-INDUSTRIAL SERVICES (C5) 1 The Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale businesses and para-industrial services (c5) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the sale of goods or products or to the sale of a service. b) Operations may require large amounts of space for indoor or outdoor storage, outdoor display, vehicular movements, and parking of fleets of vehicles. c) Attendance for the use may generate sporadic inconveniences related to major traffic movements of cars and trucks, and for transhipments. d) Transportation of the merchandise sold may require the use of heavy vehicles. e) The use is not of a sexual nature. 2 The use category Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale businesses and paraindustrial services (c5) includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

92 76 a) The wholesale of food products, consumer products, and personal and household goods (c5a), which includes only the uses under the following codes: 51 Wholesale (except for the uses under codes 515 Wholesale of farm products (primary products) and 5182 Wholesale of new and used agricultural machinery and equipment ). b) Specialty trade workshops (c5b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 2078 Artisan s workshop for local products (including food and beverages) 2698 Artisan s workshop for sewing and tailoring; 2798 Artisan s workshop for woodworking; 2898 Artisan s workshop for furniture and furnishing accessories; 2998 Artisan s workshop for papermaking; 3048 Artisan s workshop for printing and publishing; 3198 Artisan s workshop for primary metal manufacturing; 3280 Artisan s machine shop; 3298 Artisan s machine shop for metal products (ex. : tinsmithing); 3398 Artisan s workshop for machinery; 3698 Artisan s workshop for non-metallic mineral products; 6413 Body shop and car painting services; 6498 Welding service; 9831 Artisan s workshop the manufacture of signs. c) Commercial uses not listed elsewhere and that meet the requirements of paragraph 1 belong to the use category (c5c). SECTION 4: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) 41. USE CATEGORIES FOR THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) The Industrial (i) group includes 3 use categories similar in terms of their land use, the construction and the occupation of the building and the degree of impact on the neighbourhood. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

93 RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT (I1) 1 The Research and Development (i1) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the process of discovery by means of the research and the design of products or procedures; it also encompasses any final refinements for ensuring the validity and reliability of these products or procedures by means of technical tests and economic feasibility studies. b) All operations are carried out inside a building with the exception of an accessory or temporary use specifically authorized outdoors by the by-law and with the exception of a use that is, by its nature, exercised outdoors. c) The activities may involve installations for keeping animals or for the temporary accommodation of people when carrying out tests related to the research and development activities conducted for the use. d) Manufacturing activities are limited to refining the prototypes or to the production of limited quantities of substances or of products to be tested. e) In the case of high-tech research and development centres, the activities are carried out in buildings similar to office buildings, and, when these activities relate to products; these products do not require large amounts of storage or handling. f) In the case of industrial research and development centres, the activities may require installations similar to industrial installations, such as large storage areas for inputs and outputs, very high buildings or machining activities. 2 The Research and Development (i1) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) High-tech research and development centres (i1a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 3050 Software designer and programmer; Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

94 Research centre for physics and chemistry (including, in particular, optical sciences, electronics and bionics); 6366 Research centre for life sciences; 6367 Research centre for mathematics and computing; 6368 Research centre for emerging sciences (included here are language technologies and photonics); 6369 Other high-tech research and development centres; 9852 Research centre for communications and telecommunications. b) Industrial research and development centres and testing centres (i1b), which include only the following uses: 4923 Transportation testing centre (including, in particular, a collision test facility and a centre or a track for road tests); 6361 Environmental and natural resource research centre (ground, air, water); 6362 Transportation testing centre (including, in particular, a research centre for vehicles and a research centre for avionics and aerospace products); 6363 Research centre for energy and materials; 6391 Research, development and testing services (including, in particular, a research centre for avionics and aerospace products, etc.); 9851 Testing centre for thermal or mechanical shock. 43. INDUSTRIAL MANUFACTURING (I2) 1 The Industrial Manufacturing (i2) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) Activities for the use related to manufacturing, which may also include the design and refinement of finished or unfinished goods and products made by processing raw materials, mixing ingredients or assembling semi-finished products. b) The use may generate major traffic movements of heavy vehicles. 2 The Industrial Manufacturing (i2) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

95 79 a) Low-, medium- or high-impact industries (i2a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 20 Food and beverage industry (except the use 2078 Artisan s workshop for local products (including food products and beverages), and the use 2013 Rendering Industry ). b) Low-, medium- or high-impact industries (i2b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 21 Tobacco industry; 22 Rubber and plastic products industry; 23 Leather industry and related products; 24 Textile industry; 26 Clothing industry (except the use Artisan s workshop for sewing and tailoring ); 27 Wood industry (except the use Artisan s workshop for woodworking ); 28 Furniture and furnishings industry (except the use Artisan s workshop for furniture and furnishing accessories ); 29 Paper and paper products industry (except the use Artisan s workshop for papermaking ); 30 Printing, publishing and related industries (except the uses Artisan s workshop for printing and publishing and 3050 Software designer and programmer ); 31 Primary metal manufacturing industry (except the use Artisan s workshop for primary metal manufacturing ); 32 Metal products industry (except for the machinery and transportation equipment industries) (except the uses 3280 Machine shop and Artisan s machine shop for metal products ); 33 Machinery industry (except the use Artisan s machine shop ; 34 Transportation equipment industry; 35 Electrical and electronic products industry; 36 Non-metallic mineral products industry (except the uses included under codes 365 Ready mix concrete industry and Artisan s workshop for non-metallic mineral products ); 39 Other manufacturing industries. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

96 EXPLOITATION OF RAW MATERIALS (I3) 1 The Exploitation of raw materials (i3) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the extraction, handling and primary processing of raw materials. b) The use may generate major traffic movements of heavy vehicles. c) The use may cause smoke, dust, odour, heat, gas, flashing light, vibration, noise or other nuisance that may be perceptible beyond the boundaries of the landsite on which the use is carried out. 2 The Exploitation of raw materials (i3) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) The extraction and the primary processing of raw materials (i3a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 365 Ready mix concrete industry; 3711 Refined petroleum products industry (except for lubricants and grease); 3712 Lubricating oil and grease industry; 3714 Petrol refining; 3719 Other petroleum services; 3790 Other petroleum and charcoal product industries; 38 Chemical industry; 831 Commercial forestry production; 833 Peat and turf production; 8390 Other forestry activities and related services. SECTION 5: CLASSIFICATION OF LAND USES FOR THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP 45. USE CATEGORIES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP The Community (p) group includes 4 use categories of a similar nature in terms of the target clienteles, their community character and their level of accessibility by the population. Ownership or management for these uses may fall under the public or private sector. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

97 RECREATION (P1) 1 The Recreation (p1) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use is mainly exercised in an outdoor space or in direct relationship with an extensive outdoor space. b) The facilities, infrastructures and/or equipment are intended for use by the general public, mainly for the purposes of leisure, relaxation and physical activity. c) The installation of these uses is generally considered as a service to the population, which, to varying degrees, may go from the neighbourhood out to the municipality or the region. d) The installation and management of these uses are usually the responsibility of the public authority. 2 The Recreation (p1) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Outdoor installations intended for relaxation, leisure and sports (p1a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 47. INSTITUTIONS (P2) 742 Playing field and athletics track (except for uses 7424 General recreation centre and 7425 Gymnasium and athletic training ); 7431 Beach; 7433 Outdoor swimming pool and related activities; 76 Park; 921 Non-commercial forestry services. 1 The Institutions (p2) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the management of public affairs or contributes to the wellbeing and physical, intellectual and spiritual development of the population. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

98 82 b) When the use comes under the private sector, the services rendered are associated, by their nature, with those rendered by the public sector. 2 The Institutions (p2) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Religious establishments or facilities (p2a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 155 Residence for a religious institution; 6242 Cemetery; 6243 Mausoleum; 6911 Church, synagogue, mosque and temple; 6919 Other religious activities. b) Teaching establishments (p2b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 153 Residence and student housing; 681 Pre-school, primary and secondary schools; 682 University, polyvalent school, CEGEP; c) Healthcare and social services establishments (p2c), which include only the uses under the following codes: 1541 Assisted living retirement home; 1542 Orphanage; 6513 Hospital services (including psychiatric hospitals) 6516 Sanatorium, convalescent home and rest home; 653 Social services (except the use 6534 Self-help and community resource centre ); 6542 Transition house (people stay in these establishments for a limited time period). d) Cultural and sports establishments, or those related to public affairs and community services (p2d), which include only the uses under the following codes: Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

99 SERVICES (P3) 6534 Self-help and community resource centre (including resources for accommodation, furniture and food); 6711 Federal public administration; 6712 Provincial public administration; 6713 Municipal and regional public administration; 679 Other government services; 692 Welfare and charity services; 6996 Tourist information office; 6997 Community or neighbourhood centre (including a diocesan centre); 711 Cultural activity; 719 Other exhibitions of cultural objects; 7221 Stadium; 7222 Multi-use sports centre; 7229 Other sports facilities; 7424 General recreation centre (includes diverse recreational activities for all age groups and kinds of interests. The recreation centre may include, but is not limited to: a gym, rooms for games, meetings, art, crafts, etc.); 7451 Arena and related activities (ice skating). 1 The Services (p3) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the provision of a public service, management of public infrastructures or equipment, public safety and civil protection. b) When the use comes under the private sector, the services rendered are associated, by their nature, with those rendered by the public sector. 2 The Services (p3) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Security and defence (p3a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 672 Preventive duties and related activities; 674 Detention centre and correctional institution; Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

100 Military area and base. b) The production of public services and related activities (p3b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 3716 Station for controlling oil pressure; 471 Telephone communication, centre and network (except the use 4711 Telephone exchange ; 4732 Radio station and transmission tower; 4742 Television station and transmission tower; 48 Public service (except uses 485 Garbage depot and installations, Centre and network for the storage and distribution of natural gas and 4875 Recycling and sorting of pollutants and toxic materials ); 9841 Municipal garage and workshop. c) Large vehicles for the transportation of people and merchandise (p3c), which include only the uses under the following codes: 41 Railway and Metro. 43 Air transportation. 44 Sea transportation. SECTION 6: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE RECREATION (R) GROUPE 49. USE CATEGORIES IN THE RECREATION (R) GROUP The Recreation (R) group includes 2 use categories similar in terms of their recreation character, the amount of space used and their propensity to generate impacts related to traffic, noise and the presence of crowds. 50. EXTENSIVE RECREATION (R1) 1 The Extensive recreation (r1) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to recreational, outdoor or amusement activities, that require large areas of land and large infrastructures or heavy pieces of equipment or for which the practise requires huge, specially devoted or equipped outdoor areas; b) The use is generally carried out outside a building. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

101 85 2 The Extensive recreation (r1) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Activities related to watersports (r1a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 6356 Rental services for watercraft; 744 Water-related activities. b) Space-consuming recreational activities (r1b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 191 Accommodation for hunting, fishing and the forest; 712 Exhibition of objects or animals; 7224 Luge run, bobsled course and ski-jumping facility; 731 Exhibition park and amusement park; 7393 Driving range (golf); 7411 Golf course (no clubhouse or other sports facilities); 7412 Golf course (with clubhouse and other sports facilities); 7416 Horse riding (equestrian centre); 7418 Slide (waterslide); 7419 Other sports activities; 749 Other recreational activities; 75 Tourist centre and camping site for groups (except the use 7512 Health spa (including saunas, spas and therapeutic or Turkish baths) ). 51. EXTREME AND MOTORIZED SPORTS (R2) 1 The Extreme and motorized sports (r2) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to recreational, outdoor and amusement activities that require installations with large areas of land and large infrastructures or heavy pieces of equipment or for which the practise requires huge, specially designated or equipped, outdoor or indoor spaces. b) The use is generally carried out outside a building. c) The activities generally create noise. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

102 86 d) Carrying out the activities usually involves specific risks for the users or requires specific installations to limit or avoid any danger for the neighbourhood. 2 The Extreme and motorized sports (r2) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Track activities (r2a), which include only the uses under the following codes: 7223 Racetrack (includes tracks for one or more types of races (cars, motorcycles, etc.); 7225 Race course (horses); 7394 Go kart track. b) Off-track extreme sports (r2b), which include only the uses under the following codes: 748 Extreme sports activities; 7414 Indoor firing range 9871 Firing range; 9872 Archery and cross bow centre. SECTION 7: CLASSIFICATION OF USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 52. USE CATEGORIES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP The Agricultural (a) group includes 2 use categories similar in terms of the nature of the agricultural practises and the level of compatibility with the non-agricultural uses. 53. AGRICULTURAL WITHOUT LIVESTOCK (A1) 1 The Agricultural without livestock (a1) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The main use is an agricultural activity under the meaning of the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (R.S.Q., c. P-41.1) except in the case of a non-agricultural use specifically mentioned in paragraph 2 of the present article. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

103 87 b) There is no keeping or raising of animals, except for the keeping of companion animals for personal purposes, and the keeping and raising of animals when these uses are specifically mentioned in paragraph 2 of the present article. 2 The Agricultural without livestock (a1) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Plant husbandry (a1a), which includes only the uses under the following codes: 812 Farm (cereal crops); 813 Farm (except the harvesting of cereal crops, fruits and vegetables); 814 Farm (fruits and vegetables); 818 Farm in general; 8191 Pasture and grazing land (not integrated into a farm or into a ranch belonging in general to the public domain); 8192 Greenhouse, specializing in the growing of flowers (flower seeds); 8194 Farm (maple products) (maple sugaring); 8199 Other agricultural and related activities; 8293 Production of Christmas trees; 832 Commercial forestry production; 9882 Silviculture. b) The production of honey or fish (a1b), which includes only the uses under the following codes: 8193 Apiary (beekeeping); 842 Fish farm. 54. AGRICULTURE WITH LIVESTOCK (A2) 1 The Agriculture with livestock (a2) use category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The main use is an agricultural activity under the meaning of the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (R.S.Q., c. P-41.1). b) The main purpose of the activities is to keep and raise animals. Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

104 88 2 The Agriculture with livestock (a2) use category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of paragraph 1 : a) Raising of non-repugnant livestock (a2a), which includes only the following uses: 815 Farm (dairy products); 816 Farm and ranch (animals for activities other than dairy production) (except the use Farm and ranch (pig raising) ). b) Raising of repugnant livestock (a2b), which includes only the following uses: 8225 Service for keeping farm animals; 8227 Obedience training for farm animals; 8228 Grooming service for farm animals; 8229 Other services for raising farm animals. SECTION 8 : LAND USE CLASSIFICATION IN THE CONSERVATION (E) GROUP 55. USE CATEGORIES IN THE CONSERVATION (E) GROUP The Conservation (e) group includes 1 use category similar in terms of the nature of the practices. 56. CONSERVATION PARK (E1) 1 The Conservation Park (e1) category authorizes only the uses that have the following characteristics: a) The use relates to the identification of any building or territory that, because of its heritage value, the beauty of the milieu and landscape, the fragility of the natural environment, the protection of ecosystems in place or its rich natural potential, deserves to be preserved in or restored to its original state. b) A public authority implements or manages these uses. The Conservation Park (e1) category includes, unless otherwise indicated in the specifications chart, the following sub-categories of uses, insofar as the uses meet the requirements of Paragraph 1: Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

105 89 A walkway or a hiking trail A listed or classified heritage building An observation station, a lookout or a kiosk An interpretation centre or a welcome office A service with or without a storage yard A parking area and access aisles A leisure area, playground or picnic area SECTION 9: AUTHORIZED OR PROHIBITED USES 57. AUTHORIZED OR PROHIBITED USES BY ZONE Subject to article 59, the specifications chart determines which uses are authorized and which uses are prohibited in each zone. 58. USES AUTHORIZED IN ALL ZONES Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in the bylaw, the following uses are authorized in all zones: 1 Gas pressure control station (3716) ; 2 Electrical sub-station (4815) ; 3 Water pressure control station (4834) ; 4 Waste water pressure control station (4843) ; 5 Natural gas pressure control station (4863) ; 6 Amusement ground (7421) ; 7 Playground (7422) ; 8 Sports fields (7423) ; Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

106 90 9 Other playgrounds and athletic paths (7429) ; 10 Parks for general recreation (7611) ; 11 Panoramic viewpoint, road stopping place, truck stop or interpretation centre (7612) ; 12 Recreational and ornamental park (7620) ; 13 Community garden (7631) ; 14 Other parks (7639). 59. USES PROHIBITED IN ALL ZONES Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in the bylaw, the following uses are prohibited in all zones: 1 Rendering industry (2013); 2 Buildings and landsites for the collection, storage or commercial use of demolition material or waste material such as paper, cardboard, rags, scrap metal, etc. (5395); 3 Buildings and landsites for the purpose of auction sales (5155) and (5333); 4 Quarries and sand pits (85) et (89); 5 Kennels (8197); 6 Car cemeteries or tire dumps; 7 Rabbit hutches (9881); 8 Yards for scrap metal or rags; 9 Yards for waste material or garbage; 10 Dump (485); 11 Raising of pigs, poultry or fur-bearing animals (8162), (8170), (8195) and (8196); Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

107 91 12 Facilities for the treatment or storage of horsehair, decomposable material or feathers; 13 Plants making benzene or derivatives, candles, bituminous concrete, explosives, mineral oils, naphtha and derivatives, paraffin, pitch, turpentine and derivatives; 14 Smelters; 15 Charcoal ovens; 16 Lime kilns; 17 Pigeon lofts; 18 Sites or warehouses for dangerous materials (4875). Chapter 4 : Provisions relative to the classification of main land uses

108 92 CHAPTER 5 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS 60. SCOPE OF THE CHAPTER The present chapter does not apply to a temporary use that also constitutes an additional use or an accessory use to a main use. The provisions in chapters 9 to 12 inclusively and in the specifications chart do not apply to a temporary use or to a temporary building targeted by the present chapter. SECTION 1: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR ALL USES 61. BLOOD COLLECTION The holding of a blood donor clinic is authorized as a temporary use on any landsite or in any building, whatever the main use. The time period for this use is not limited. 62. CONSTRUCTION SITE HUT A modular building or trailer is authorized as a temporary building on a construction site to serve as a site office, premises for the workers or a material and tool depot. When the site involves the construction of a building with a total floor area of more than 10,000 m², the temporary building may also house food services for the workers. The number of temporary buildings on a construction site is unlimited. The temporary building may be installed on the landsite as soon as the building permit or the certificate of authorization has been issued for the construction to begin. It must be removed within 30 days of the completion of the construction work or the expiry date for the permit or certificate, whichever comes first. Use of the site hut as housing is prohibited. The temporary building must be installed at least 3 m from any street line and 1.5 m from any side or rear landsite boundary line. Chapter 5 : Provisions relative to temporary uses and buildings

109 REAL ESTATE SALES OFFICE A modular building is authorized as a temporary building to serve as a real estate sales office on a landsite that forms part of a real estate project. The temporary building may be installed upon the issuance of a written authorization from the designated official. The designated official may issue this authorization once Council has approved the parcelling proposal, or, should the approval procedure for a parcelling proposal not apply, once the building permit for construction to begin on the real estate project has been issued. Authorization to install a temporary building to serve as a real estate sales office is valid for a period of 365 days. It is renewable until the real estate project has been completed. The temporary building must be removed within 30 days of the completion of the construction work or the expiry date for the last permit or certificate, whichever comes first. The temporary building must be installed at least 3 m from any street line and 1.5 m from any side or rear landsite boundary line. SECTION 2: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 64. WINTER GARAGE, WINTER DOORWAY SHELTER AND WINTER TUNNEL It is permitted to install a single winter garage, a single winter doorway shelter and a single winter tunnel on a landsite occupied by a main use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) and Twofamily and three-family dwellings (h2) use categories, under the following conditions: 1 A winter shelter may be installed during the period from November 1 of one year until April 15 of the following year. 2 A winter shelter is authorized in all yards, at least 1 m from the sidewalk and at least 2.5 m from the edge of the street or of the roadway, as the case may be. 3 A winter garage must be located in an off-street parking area or in an entrance aisle leading to the off-street parking area. 4 The maximum height of a winter shelter is set at 3 m. Chapter 5 : Provisions relative to temporary uses and buildings

110 94 5 The structure must be covered in a tone of white fibrous synthetic canvas, waterproof and fireproof. 6 The materials used for the winter shelter must be well maintained. SECTION 3: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP 65. STAND FOR THE OUTDOOR SALE OF CHRSITMAS TREES FOR A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP It is permitted to install a stand for the outdoor sale of Christmas trees on any landsite occupied by a main use in the Commercial (c) group under the following conditions: 1 The space occupied by the installations associated with the stand may be located inside an off-street parking area. 2 The stand must be located on a landsite occupied by a main building. 3 The stand is authorized from November 15 to December 30 inclusively of the same year. 4 The footprint of the stand must not exceed 30 m² per landsite. 5 It is permitted to install a single-module modular building or a trailer on the landsite being used for the sale, on the following conditions: a) The temporary building must be removed no later than the day following the end of the authorized exploitation period in effect or the end of the exploitation period authorized, whichever comes first; b) The temporary building must be installed at least 4 m from a landsite boundary line. 66. FAIRS, FESTIVALS, PUBLIC CELEBRATIONS, FAIRGROUNDS AND CIRCUSES FOR A SHOPPING CENTRE OR AN INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL PROJECT The following temporary uses are authorized on a landsite occupied by a shopping centre or an integrated commercial project: Chapter 5 : Provisions relative to temporary uses and buildings

111 95 1 Holding a fair, a festival or a public celebration, or operating a fairground. 2 Presentation of a circus show. 3 Retail sales stores, retail services, entertainment and food services, as well as recreational activities exercised as an accessory to a use mentioned in paragraphs 1 or 2 above. These temporary uses are authorized under the following conditions: 1 The period of operation must not exceed 15 consecutive days. 2 The maximum number of operating periods is limited to 2 per landsite in the same year. 3 The public must have access to toilets on the landsite on which the temporary use is exercised. 4 Waste bins or containers and recycling bins must be installed on the landsite on which the temporary use is exercised. 5 No equipment may be placed and no use may be exercised within 3 m of the landsite boundary line. A modular building, a trailer, a big top circus tent or a stand is authorized as a temporary building to house a temporary use or an accessory use for a temporary use. The number of temporary buildings is unlimited. The temporary building must respect the minimum front and side setbacks on a street prescribed in the specifications chart for the zone in which the landsite is located. Notwithstanding the preceding, a structure necessary to the temporary use may not be installed within 3 m of a landsite boundary line. SECTION 5: TEMPORARY USES AND BUILDINGS AUTHORIZED FOR USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP 67. WINTER DOORWAY SHELTER AND WINTER TUNNEL It is permitted to install a single winter doorway shelter and a single winter tunnel on a landsite occupied by a main use in the Community (p) group of uses, on the following conditions: 1 A winter shelter may be installed during the period from October 15 of one year until April 15 of the following year. Chapter 5 : Provisions relative to temporary uses and buildings

112 96 2 A winter shelter is authorized in all yards, at least 1 m from the sidewalk and at least 2 m from the edge of the street or of the roadway, as the case may be. 3 The maximum height of a winter shelter is set at 3 m. 4 The structure must be covered in a fibrous synthetic canvas, waterproof and fireproof, with a white color. 5 The materials used for a winter shelter must be well maintained. 68. FAIRS, FESTIVALS, PUBLIC CELEBRATIONS, FAIRGROUNDS AND CIRCUSES FOR A USE IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP Article 0 is applicable, in adaptation, to a landsite occupied by a main use in the Community (p) group of uses. Chapter 5 : Provisions relative to temporary uses and buildings

113 97 CHAPTER 6 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES 69. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR EXERCISING ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES Exercising an additional use or a dependent use does not change the nature of the main use of a building or a landsite. To be considered as an additional use or a dependent use, a use must respect all the provisions applicable to it in virtue of the present chapter. A use that could be considered as an additional use or a dependent use but that does not respect all the provisions applicable in the present chapter is considered as being a main use. It is subject to all the provisions in the by-law relative to main uses. SECTION 2: USES ADDITIONAL TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 70. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1), TWO-FAMILY DWELLING AND THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) AND MULTI-FAMILY HOUSING (H3) USE CATEGORIES The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that belong to the Single-family dwelling (h1), Two-family dwelling and Three-family dwelling (h2) and Multi-family housing (h3) use categories are, in a limitative manner: 1 The rental of rooms with board and lodging. 2 A service business within the limits of the following uses: a) Office of a professional exercising one of the following professions regulated by the Professional Code (R.S.Q., c. C-26): Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

114 98 Lawyer Notary Agronomist Architect Engineer (including Forestry Engineer) Land Surveyor Certified General Accountant, Chartered Accountant or Certified Management Accountant Bailiff Geologist Social Worker Certified Human Resource and Industrial Relations Professional Urban planner Chartered Administrator Accredited Appraiser Professional Technologist, with the exception of a technologist associated with medical and healthcare services, paramedical or therapeutic care; b) Massage therapist, chiropractor, physiotherapist c) Landscape architect d) Business office associated with the administration of a company (office only) e) Environmental services office f) Real estate or insurance agent or broker, stockbroker or commodities broker office g) Travel agency h) Secretarial, translation, typing or word processing services i) Computing services j) Administration and business consultancy services k) Home school l) Music teaching Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

115 99 m) Dressmaking n) Telecommuting o) Home childcare service p) Foster family, foster home or an intermediary resource. 71. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) USE CATEGORY In addition to the additional uses mentioned in Article 0, the following additional uses are authorized for a main use that is part of the Single-family dwelling (h1) use category for a detached, semi-detached or rowhouse structure: 1 An additional dwelling unit. 2 Tourist B&B type accommodation. 72. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED FOR A BUILDING WITH MORE THAN 60 DWELLING UNITS OR MORE THAN 120 ROOMS The following limited uses are authorized as additional uses inside a building with more than 60 dwelling units, for a main use that is part of the Multi-family dwelling (h3) use category or inside a building with more than 120 rooms, for a main use that is part of the Collective housing (h4) use category: 1 Convenience store (with no gas sales). 2 Restaurant. 3 Retail sale of medications and diverse articles (pharmacy). 4 Medical clinic (General Practitioner offices). 5 Depot for laundry, dry-cleaning and dyeing services. 6 Beauty salon. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

116 100 7 Hair salon. 8 Hairdresser. 9 Beauty parlour. 10 Church, synagogue, mosque and temple and other religious activities. 11 Indoor swimming pool and related activities. 12 Gymnasium and athletics training. 73. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE An additional use to the following conditions: 1 An additional use must be carried out inside the main building. 2 The additional use must not occasion any outdoor storage or display. 3 Installation of an additional use must not lead to modifications to the exterior appearance of the building, in particular in regard to its residential architecture. Among other things, the addition of a door on the main façade of the building is prohibited. 4 Except in the case of an intermediary resource or a use mentioned in Article 0, an additional use is also subject to the following conditions: a) The additional use must be installed inside a dwelling unit and the person carrying out the use must have his main domicile in this dwelling unit. b) Access to the additional use must be common with that of the dwelling unit in which it is located. c) There must be no more than 2 additional uses per dwelling unit. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

117 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF BOARDING ROOMS In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the additional use of boarding rooms is subject to the following conditions: 1 No more than 2 boarding rooms may be let per dwelling unit. 2 The gross floor area of the boarding rooms offered for rent must not represent more than 50% of the gross floor area of the dwelling unit, or 120 m², whichever area is smaller. 3 A boarding room offered for rent must not be in a cellar but may be in a basement. 4 The installation of an additional use must not involve modifications to the outdoor offstreet parking area for the landsite on which it is located, unless they must be made in order to respect the total minimum number of spaces required in Article without exceeding this number. 75. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF SERVICE BUSINESS In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the additional use of service business is subject to the following conditions: 1 The business must not employ more than one person who is not domiciled in the dwelling unit. 2 The floor area occupied by the business(es) may not exceed 25% of the total floor area of the dwelling unit. 3 The sale of products or goods originating outside the dwelling unit is not permitted. 4 A display window facing the outside is not permitted. 5 A home schooling service business is also subject to the following conditions: a) The school may not have more than 3 students at the same time; b) The school may not provide instruction related to a sports activity or athletics training. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

118 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF HOME CHILDCARE SERVICE In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the additional use of Home childcare service is subject to the following conditions: 1 The childcare service may be located only in the basement, on the ground floor or on the floor immediately above the ground floor of a building. 2 The childcare service may not be located on the floor immediately above a dwelling unit. 77. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF ADDITIONAL DWELLING UNIT In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the additional use of additional dwelling unit is subject to the following conditions: 1 A single additional dwelling unit is authorized per main building occupied by a use that is part of the single-family dwelling (h1) use category. 2 The floor are of the additional dwelling unit may not exceed 40% of the total floor area of the building in which it is located (including the basement): a) The floor area of the additional dwelling unit must be at least 40 m². b) The total floor area of the building in which the additional dwelling unit is located must be at least 160 m². 3 The additional dwelling unit may not have a separate civic address number, and only one electrical entry is authorized. 4 An additional dwelling unit must at all times be connected internally to the dwelling unit in which it is located, and a single entrance leading directly to the outside is authorized, on condition that this entrance is installed on one of the side or rear façades of the building. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

119 103 5 The additional dwelling unit must be equipped with at least one smoke detector, which must be connected electrically so that when any smoke detector in the building is set off, all the others will also be set off automatically. 78. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF TOURIST B&B-TYPE ACCOMMODATION In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the additional use of tourist B&B-type accommodation is subject to the following conditions: 1 No more than 3 rooms may be let per dwelling unit. 2 The person operating the additional use must hold a permit related to a tourist B&B, issued in virtue of the Regulation respecting tourist accommodation establishments (R.Q., c. E-14.2, r. 1). 3 A room in a cellar may not be offered for letting purposes. 79. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE AUTHORIZED IN A BUILDING WITH MORE THAN 60 DWELLING UNITS OR MORE THAN 120 ROOMS In addition to the conditions applicable in virtue of Article 0, an additional use mentioned in Article 0 is subject to the following conditions: 1 The additional use must not be carried out inside a dwelling unit. 2 Each additional use must occupy a separate space. 3 The gross floor area for the additional uses must not exceed 5% of the total floor area of the building. 4 The additional use must be located on the ground floor or in the basement of the building. 5 The installation of an additional use must not involve modifications to the outdoor offstreet parking area for the landsite on which it is located, unless they must be made in order to respect the total minimum number of spaces required in Article 0, without exceeding this number. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

120 104 SECTION 3: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP 80. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that is part of the Commercial (c) group are, in a non-limitative manner: 1 A use authorized in the specifications chart and part of the same sub-use category as the main use. 2 Business administration and management associated with a main use. 3 An automated bank machine. 4 Maintenance, repair or rental services for a consumer product or a car offered on site, or associated with the main use. 5 The following additional uses, insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the employees of the establishment: a) A cafeteria or other food services; b) A childcare service or a stop-over childcare service; c) A gymnasium; d) A health centre. 6 The following additional uses for a main use that is part of the Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) Retail sale of Hardware (5251), occupying a building with a gross floor area of at least 1,400 m²: a) Retail sale of flowers, shrubs, trees, landscaping and gardening articles and accessories; 7 On-site food preparation for the main uses included under the code 54 Retail sale of food products. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

121 105 8 The following additional uses for a main use in the sub-use category Licensed establishments and dance halls (c4b) : a) Coin-operated amusement arcade; b) Pool hall; c) Lottery and games of chance. 9 A restaurant for the use Establishment serving alcoholic beverages (5821). 10 An establishment in which beverages are served and diverse activities are offered, without the presentation of a show and without a dance hall, for the use Full-service restaurant (5811), insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the customers of the establishment. 11 The presentation of shows, excluding any show of a sexual nature, for the following main uses: a) Full-service restaurant (5811) ; b) Establishment with a reception or banquet hall (5815) ; c) A main use in the Accommodation and conference services (c2c) sub-use category that consists of at least 75 accommodation units, except for the specific use Tourist home (5834). 12 A dance hall for the following main uses: a) Establishment with a reception or banquet hall (5815) ; b) A main use in the Accommodation and conference services (c2c) sub-use category that consists of at least 75 accommodation units, except for the specific use Tourist home (5834). 13 The retail sale of pressurized gas in maximum 9.1 kg bottles with no on-site refilling, for a main use that is part of the Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) sub-use category. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

122 The following additional uses for a main use included under the code 553 Service station, except for the specific use Service station with car repairs (5531) : a) Mechanized or manual car wash, except for heavy vehicles; b) Movie and video game rental; c) Automated bank machine; d) Depot for laundry and dry cleaning services; e) Restaurant; f) Retail sale of pressurized gas in maximum 9.1 kg bottles with no on-site refilling; g) Car rental service. h) Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods. 15 The following additional use for a use included under the code Retail sale of pressurized gases (5983) : a) Rental service for trucks, utility trailers and recreational vehicles (6355). 16 The following additional use for a use included under the following codes Retail sale (florist) (5991), Retail sale of flowers, shrubs, trees, landscape and garden accessories (5361) and Retail sale of construction materials (5212) : a) Greenhouse, specializing in floriculture (flower seeds) (8192). 81. DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as dependent uses for a main use that is part of the Commercial (c) group are limited to: Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

123 107 1 An establishment in which beverages are served and diverse activities are offered, without the presentation of a show and without a dance hall, insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the customers of the establishment: a) a main use that is part of the Intensive commercial entertainment (c2a) sub-use category; b) a main use that is part of the Commercial entertainment with a place of assembly (c2b) sub-use category; c) a main use that is part of the Accommodation and conference services (c2c) sub-use category that consists of at least 10 accommodation units, except for the specific use Tourist home (5834). 2 An establishment holding a meeting permit, issued or likely to be issued in virtue of the Act respecting liquor permits (R.S.Q., c. P9.1), authorizing the sale of alcoholic beverages for on-site consumption for the main use Civic, social or fraternal association (6994). 3 An establishment with a reception or banquet hall for a main use that is part of the Accommodation and conference services (c2c) sub-use category that consists of at least 10 accommodation units, except for the specific use Tourist home (5834). 82. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED In order to be authorized, the additional use must not be a use listed under Use specifically excluded in the specifications chart for the zone in which the main use is located. Moreover, the floor area occupied by an additional use and a dependent use for a main use that is part of the Commercial (c) group, or the total floor are occupied by all the additional uses and dependent uses, if there is more than one, must be less than the total floor area occupied by the main use. An additional use or a dependent use must be accessible by means of an access shared with the main use. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

124 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF COIN- OPERATED AMUSEMENT ARCADE, POOLHALL AND LOTTERY AND GAMES OF CHANCE M M M M Notwithstanding Article 82, the floor area occupied by each additional use as a Coin-operated amusement arcade, Pool hall or Lottery and games of chance must not exceed 5% of the total floor are of the establishment. The total floor area occupied by all these additional uses may not exceed 10% of the total floor area of the establishment. (CA ; ) 84. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES Notwithstanding Article 82, the floor area of the dependent use Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities, or the floor area occupied by all dependent uses, if there is more than one, may not exceed 15% of the total floor area of the establishment, nor exceed 50 m². (CA ; ) 85. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT HOLDING A MEETING PERMIT IN VIRTUE OF THE ACT RESPECTING LIQUOR PERMITS (R.S.Q., C. P9.1) Notwithstanding Article 82, the floor area of the dependent use Establishment holding a meeting permit in virtue of the Act respecting liquor permits (R.S.Q., C. P9.1) may represent 100% of the total floor area occupied by the main use. (CA ; ) 86. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE OF ESTABLISHMENT WITH A RECEPTION OR BANQUET HALL In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 82, the following provisions apply to the dependent use Establishment with a reception or banquet hall : (CA ; ) 1 The distance, within the same zone, between a building occupied by the dependent use Establishment with a reception or banquet hall and a building occupied by a main use in the Housing (h1) group must be at least 75 m. The present paragraph does not apply in the following cases: Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

125 109 a) When the dependent use is located in a building with a floor area of 5,000 m² or more; b) When the dependent use occupies of floor area of 50 m² or less; c) When the building occupied by a main use that is part of the Housing group is located in a zone where main uses that are parts of the Commercial (C) group are authorized. SECTION 4: ADDITIONAL USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP 87. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that is part of the Industrial (i) group are, in a non-limitative way: 1 A use authorized in the specifications chart that is in the same sub-use category as the main use. 2 The following additional uses insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the employees of the establishment: a) Cafeteria or other food services; b) Day care or stop-over childcare service; c) Gym; d) Health centre. 3 Business administration and management associated with the main use. 4 A showroom or space for the retail sale of the products manufactured by the industrial facility. 5 Wholesale of the products manufactured by the industrial facility. 6 Maintenance, repair or refuelling of equipment, machinery or a vehicle necessary for the operations of the industrial facility. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

126 GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED In order to be authorized, the additional use must not be a use listed under Use specifically excluded in the specifications chart for the zone in which the main use is located. Moreover, the floor area or landsite area occupied by an additional use for a main use that is part of the Industrial (i) group, or the total floor area or landsite area occupied by all the additional uses, if there is more than one, must be less than the total floor area or landsite area occupied by the main use. 89. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE SHOWROOM OR SALES AREA Notwithstanding Article 88, the floor area occupied by the additional use Showroom or sales area may not exceed 25% of the total floor area for the facility, nor exceed 300 m². 90. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 0, the following provisions apply to the additional uses Daycare service and Stop-over childcare service : 1 The daycare and stop-over childcare services may be located only on the ground floor or on the floor immediately above the ground floor of a building. SECTION 5: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP 91. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that is part of the Community (p) group are, in a non-limitative way: Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

127 111 1 A use authorized in the specifications chart and that is in the same sub-use category as the main use. 2 Business administration and management associated with the main use. 3 The following additional uses insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the employees of the establishment: a) Cafeteria and other food services; b) Daycare service or a stop-over childcare service; c) Gym; d) Health centre. 4 The following additional uses for a main use that is part of the Religious establishments or facilities (p2a) sub-use category, except the specific uses Cemetery (6242) and Mausoleum (6243) : a) Reproduction and advertising associated with the main use; b) A civic, social or fraternal association; c) Specialized training in the arts, culture and other related fields of activity; d) Welfare and charity services; e) Self-help and community resource centre. 5 The following additional uses for a main use that is part of the Teaching establishments (p2b) sub-use category, insofar as they are mainly intended for the clients of the establishments: a) Cafeteria or other food services; b) Research, development and testing services associated with the main use; c) Medical laboratory services; Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

128 112 d) Retail sale of books, paper, pictures and frames; e) Retail sale of a dry goods consumer product associated with the main use; f) Daycare or stop-over childcare services; g) Gym and other installations for sports; h) Health centre; i) Church, synagogue, mosque, temple and other religious activities. 6 The following additional uses for a main use that is part of the Healthcare and social services establishments (p2c) sub-use category, except for the specific uses Social service centre and Health and social service centre (CSS and CRSSS) (6533) and Other social service centres or offices of social services practitioners (6539), insofar as they are mainly intended for the clients of the establishments: a) Cafeteria and other food services; b) Medical laboratory services; c) Retail sale of gifts, souvenirs and various items; d) Laundry service; e) Daycare or stop-over childcare service; f) Gym and other installations for sports; g) Health centre; h) Church, synagogue, mosque, temple and other religious activities. 7 The following additional uses for a main use that is part of these sub-categories of uses: Outdoor installations intended for relaxation, leisure and sports (p1a) or Cultural and sports establishments, or those related to public affairs and community services (p2d) : Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

129 113 a) Retail sale of dairy products (dairy bar); b) Restaurant; c) Retail sale books, paper, pictures and frames; d) Retail sale of gifts, souvenirs and various items; e) Art gallery; f) Daycare or stop-over childcare service; g) Athletics training related to the main use; h) Retail sale, rental or maintenance of a dry goods consumer product associated with the main use. 8 Maintenance, repair or refuelling of equipment, machinery or a vehicle necessary for the operations of the establishment for a main use that is part of the Services (p3) use category. 92. DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as dependent uses for a main use that is part of the Community (p) group are limited to: 1 An Establishment in which beverages are served and diverse activities are offered, without the presentation of a show and without a dance hall, insofar as they are for the exclusive use of the customers of the establishment: a) A main use that is part of the Outdoor installations intended for relaxation, leisure and sports (p1a) sub-use category; b) A main use that is part of the Cultural and sports establishments, or those related to public affairs and community services (p2d) sub-use category; 2 An establishment with a reception or banquet hall for a main use that is part of the sub-use category Religious establishments or facilities (p2a) sub-use category, except the specific uses Cemetery (6242) and Mausoleum (6243). Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

130 GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED In order to be authorized, the additional use must not be a use listed under Use specifically excluded in the specifications chart for the zone in which the main use is located. Moreover, the floor area occupied by an additional use and a dependent use for a main use that is part of the Community (p) group, or the total floor area occupied by all the additional uses and dependent uses, if there is more than one, must be less than the total floor area occupied by the main use. 94. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF RETAIL SALE OF DRY GOODS CONSUMER PRODUCTS Notwithstanding Article 93, the floor area occupied by the additional uses Retail sale of dry goods consumer products associated with the main use, Retail sale of gifts, souvenirs and various items and Retail sale of books, paper, pictures and frames may not exceed 25% of the total floor area of the establishment, nor exceed 300 m². 95. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 93, the following provisions apply to the additional uses Daycare service and Stop-over childcare service : 1 Daycare service and stop-over childcare service may only be located in the basement, on the ground floor and/or on the floor immediately above the ground floor of a building. 96. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES Notwithstanding Article 93, the floor area occupied by the dependent use Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities, or the floor area occupied by all the dependent uses, if there is more than one, may not exceed 15% of the total floor area of the establishment, nor exceed 50 m². Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

131 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT WITH RECEPTION OR BANQUET HALL In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 93, the following provisions apply to the dependent use Establishment with a reception or banquet hall : 1 The distance between a building occupied by the dependent use Establishment with a reception or banquet hall and a building occupied by a main use in the Housing (h1) group must be at least 75 m. The present paragraph does not apply in the following cases: a) When the dependent use is located in a building with a floor area of 5,000 m² or more; b) When the dependent use occupies a floor area of 50 m² or less; c) When the building occupied by the main use that is part of the Housing (h) group is located in a zone in which the main uses that are part of the Commercial (C) group are authorized. SECTION 6: ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES FOR THE USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP 98. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that is part of the Recreational (r) group are, in a non-limitative way: 1 A use authorized in the specifications chart and that is in the same sub-use category as the main use. 2 Retail sale of dairy products (dairy bar). 3 Restaurant. 4 Retail sale of books, paper, pictures and frames. 5 Retail sale of gifts, souvenirs and various items. 6 Art gallery. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

132 116 7 Daycare or stop-over childcare service. 8 Athletics training associated with the main use. 9 Maintenance, repair or rental service for a dry goods consumer product or for a vehicle associated with the main use. 10 Retail sale of dry goods consumer products associated with the main use. 99. AUTHORIZED DEPENDENT USE The only use authorized as a dependent use for a main use in the Recreational(r) group is limited to an Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities, without the presentation of a show or a dance hall PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AND DEPENDENT USES AUTHORIZED In order to be authorized, the additional use must not be a use listed under Use specifically excluded in the specifications chart for the zone in which the main use is located. Moreover, the floor area occupied by an additional use and a dependent use for a main use that is part of the Recreational (r) group, or the total floor area occupied by all the additional uses and dependent uses, if there is more than one, must be less than the total floor area occupied by the main use. Notwithstanding the second clause, the floor area occupied by the additional use Retail sale of dry goods consumer products associated with the main use may not exceed 25% of the total floor area of the establishment, nor exceed 300 m². Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

133 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES OF DAYCARE SERVICE AND STOP-OVER CHILDCARE SERVICE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 100, the following provisions apply to the additional uses Daycare service and Stop-over childcare service : 1 Daycare service and stop-over childcare service may only be located in the basement, on the ground floor and/or on the floor immediately above the ground floor of a building SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE DEPENDENT USE ESTABLISHMENT SERVING BEVERAGES AND OFFERING DIVERSE ACTIVITIES Notwithstanding Article 100, the floor area occupied by the dependent use Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities, or the floor area occupied by all the dependent uses, if there is more than one, may not exceed 15% of the total floor area of the establishment, nor exceed 50 m². A dependent use for an Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities must be accessible by means of an access shared with the main use. SECTION 7: ADDITIONAL USES TO THE USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 103. ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED The uses authorized as additional uses to a main use that is part of the Agricultural (a) group are limited to: 1 A use authorized in the specifications chart and part of the same sub-use category as the main use. 2 A dwelling associated with a farm. 3 An activity by an artisan for processing and packaging an agricultural product. 4 The sale of an agricultural product. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

134 118 5 A service offering educational or recreational tours related to an activity carried out on a farm. 6 An equestrian centre for the main use of Farm and ranch (horse breeding) (8165). 7 Farm meal service. 8 Sugar shack meal service for the main use Farm (maple products) (maple sugaring) (8194) GENERAL PROVISION APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USES AUTHORIZED An additional use for a main use that is part of the Agricultural (a) group must be carried out by an agricultural producer SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM The additional use Dwelling associated with a farm is subject to the following conditions: 1 The dwelling must be a detached, single-family dwelling and must be a residence permitted in virtue of Article 0 of the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (R.S.Q., c. P-41.1), as follows: a) the home of an individual whose main occupation is farming; b) the home of a child of an individual whose main occupation is farming; c) the home of an employee of an individual whose main occupation is farming; d) the home of a shareholder or a partner in a farming company or corporation on condition that the main occupation of the shareholder or partner is farming; Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

135 119 e) the home of an employee hired to carry out farming activities for a farming company or corporation. 2 The construction of a building must respect the standards prescribed and the specific provisions set out in the applicable provisions in the specifications chart, for a use in the Housing (h) group authorized as a main use in the zone. The additional uses listed in articles 0 et 0 are authorized, under the conditions prescribed depending on the type of additional use, in a dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a building housing a single-family dwelling SPECIFIC PROVISION APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF ACTIVITY BY AN ARTISAN FOR PROCESSING AND PACKAGING A FARM PRODUCT OR SALE OF A FARM PRODUCT An additional use for an activity by an artisan for processing and packaging a farm product or the sale of a farm product is authorized only if the activities are carried out on the farm on which the major portion of the agricultural products originate SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE ADDITIONAL USE OF FARM MEAL SERVICE The additional use of Farm meal service is subject to the following conditions: 1 The use must be carried out in a dwelling located on a farm. 2 The dwelling must be the home of the farmer. 3 The meal may be served inside or outside the dwelling. 4 Farm meals are offered only to groups and the seating capacity may not exceed 30 people at a time. 5 The meal consists mainly of dishes prepared from products that mainly originate on the farm on which the use is carried out. Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

136 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ADDITIONAL USE OF SUGAR SHACK MEAL SERVICE The additional use of Sugar shack meal service is subject to the following conditions: 1 The use is permitted during the sugaring-off season, i.e., the period during which maple sap is harvested, and may continue for no more than 30 days after the harvest ends, and no later than April 15 of the same year. 2 The use must be carried out in a sugar shack located on the same land as the maple stand exploited for maple sugar production. 3 The use must be carried out the farmer who exploits the maple stand. 4 The seating capacity for the meal service may not exceed 100 people at a time Chapter 6 : Provisions relative to additional uses and dependent uses

137 121 CHAPTER 7 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE SITING AND TO THE VOLUME OF A BUILDING OR A STRUCTURE SECTION 1: PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO SETBACKS AND TO THE TRIANGLE OF VISIBILITY 109. CALCULATING SETBACKS The prescribed setback must be measured: 1 To the exterior face of the foundation wall, if the outside wall of the building does not project beyond the foundation wall. 2 To the exterior face of the outside wall of the building, if this wall of the building projects beyond the foundation wall. 3 To the exterior face of the columns supporting the roof, when the wall is open. 4 To the centre of a party wall. An outside wall of a building is not considered as projecting beyond the foundation wall if only the exterior cladding of the outside wall projects beyond the foundation wall and provided that this projection does not exceed 0.15 m SIDE SETBACK APPLICABLE ON A CORNER LANDSITE Notwithstanding the minimum side setback prescribed in the specifications chart, on a corner landsite, the minimum side setbacks on the sides facing the road must be at least 3 m SIDE SETBACK FOR A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING When the applicable specifications chart authorizes a semi-detached or rowhouse building, the side setback applicable to a party wall is 0 m. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

138 SIDE SETBACK APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY When the applicable specifications chart authorizes a detached building in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category, the following rules apply for determining the minimum side setback: 1 When the building does not have an attached garage, one of the minimum side setbacks must be 3 m, while the other is that prescribed in the applicable specifications chart; 2 When a garage is attached to the building, the minimum side setback must be 2 m. In addition, if habitable rooms are located above or on more than one side of the garage, the minimum side setback must be 2 m LATERAL 3 TYPE CONSTRUCTION For Lateral 3 type structures, the minimum side setback is that prescribed in the specifications chart and the minimum side setback is 1.2 m. N Lateral 3 type structures are only permitted when the use sub-category Single-family Dwelling of semi-detached type is authorized. The applicable standards are those from the corresponding chart to the category single-family dwelling of semi-detached type except from the standard specified by the first paragraph. (CA ; ) 114. SIDE AND REAR SETBACKS FOR A WALL WITH AN OPENING When the applicable specifications chart authorizes a side or rear setback or 1.5 m or less, and the wall of the building has an opening, the building must be erected at a minimum distance of 1.5 m from the landsite boundary line if this opening creates a direct view onto an adjacent landsite, unless a servitude of view has been established and published in conformity with the provisions in the Civil Code (C.C.Q., 1991, c. 64) TRIANGLE OF VISIBILITY A triangle of visibility must be delineated on any corner landsite and for each side of an entrance to an off-street parking area, in accordance with the following provisions: 1 In the case of a corner landsite, the triangle of visibility is delineated as follows: Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

139 123 a) Two sides of the triangle are formed by the lines of the street. Each of these sides must be 9 m in length. This length is measured along the edge of the curb or the pavement, from the point of intersection of these lines. If the corner is rounded, the length is measured from the point of intersection of their rectilinear extensions. b) The third side is formed by the straight line joining the ends of the two sides determined in paragraph a). 2 In the case of an entrance to an off-street parking area, a triangle of visibility must be delineated on either side of the entrance. Each triangle of visibility is delineated as follows: a) One side of the triangle is formed by the street line, and the other by a line along the inside of the entrance. Each of these sides must be 2.5 m, measured from their point of intersection. b) The third side of the triangle is formed by a straight line joining the ends of the two sides determined in paragraph a). The space inside the triangle of visibility must be left free of all objects, structures or other works the height of which is greater than 1 m, measured from the level of the crown of the road. No landsite entrance, entrance aisle, off-street parking area, loading bay, delivery area or manœuvering area may be located, in part or in whole, inside the triangle of visibility. Paragraph 1 does not apply when the prescribed front setback is 3m at the most. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

140 124 Triangle of visibility for a corner landsite: Triangle of visibility for an entrance to an off-street parking area: Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

141 125 SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 116. SITING OF A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE STRUCTURE When the structure of a building must be semi-detached or contiguous (rowhouse) in virtue of the provisions applicable in the specifications chart, the building must be placed on the side boundary line of the landsite, alongside the party wall, over a depth of at least 5 m from the main façade of the building SITING OF AN ACCESSORY BUILDING An accessory building must be located on a landsite occupied by a main building. Notwithstanding the first clause, an accessory building may be installed on a landsite occupied by a main use that is carried out without a main building, in conformity with the provisions in articles 0, 0 and 0. SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES FOR THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 118. MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING A main use in the Housing (h) group may only be carried out on a landsite on which the closed main building is located NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS Only one main building is permitted per landsite, except when each building is occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group that is part of an integrated housing project authorized in virtue of the present by-law. For an integrated housing project, all the main buildings must be occupied for the purpose of the same main use. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

142 INSTALLATION OF A STOREY IN THE ATTIC SPACE When the specifications chart authorizes a maximum building height of 2 storeys for buildings occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) and Two-family and three-family dwellings (h2) categories, a third storey may be installed in the attic space only DEVELOPMENTS OF AN INTEGRATED HOUSING PROJECT An integrated housing project is authorized for a group of buildings occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group of uses on the following conditions: 1 The integrated housing project must have a minimum of 2 main buildings. Each portion of a building belonging to a semi-detached or row-house building is considered to be a single main building. 2 Each main building must be accessible from the street by an access aisle with a minimum width of 6.5 m and covered in asphalt, concrete, concrete pavers or stone pavers, so that each building is accessible to emergency vehicles. 3 The sitting of main buildings must be in conformity with the following provisions: a) The minimum distance between a main building and an access aisle may not be less than 3 m; b) The minimum distance between a main building and a landsite boundary line is set as follows: M When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Community (P) : 6 m. When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Industrial (I) or to a railway line: 30 m. M When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Commercial (C) : 3 m, but never less than the height of the building that is part of the integrated project. (CA : ) Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

143 127 When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (H) : 6 m, but never less than the height of the building that is part of the integrated project multiplied by if the length of the wall parallel to this landsite boundary line is less than 60 m, or by 0.75 if the length of the wall is 60 m or more. c) The distance between a main building and another main building that is part of the integrated project is set as follows: The minimum distance between two buildings must be equal to half of the cumulative height of the two buildings. However, this distance must be increased by 25% if two walls or parts of walls of the buildings are parallel or almost parallel (with a maximum splay of 20%) over a length of between 20 m and 60 m, and by 50% if the walls are parallel or almost parallel (with a maximum splay of 20%) over a length of more than 60 m. N In case of contradiction between the applicable setbacks for a main building provided in paragraph 3º and the specifications chart, the less restrictive standard is applied. (CA ; ) 4 The exterior cladding materials of the main buildings must be identical. 5 When the project has more than 40 dwelling units, an outdoor children s playground with a minimum area of 5 m 2 per dwelling unit must be installed and offer sunny areas and areas shaded by planting. This outdoor playground may form part of the leisure area required under the provisions in the present by-law. 6 Above-ground swimming and wading pools are prohibited. 7 An access aisle that is more than 90 m in length must end in a turning circle with a diameter of 36 m. 8 Walkways and outdoor off-street parking areas must be illuminated with lighting bollards, minimum 50 watts, spaced no more than 5 m apart, with a maximum height of 1 m, or with 50- to100-watt lampposts, with a maximum height of 4 m and spaced 20 m to 35 m apart. (CA ; ) Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

144 128 9 Any exterior staircase leading to a level above the ground floor is prohibited. 10 A rear or side façade of a building facing a street must be clad in the same exterior cladding material as the main façade. 11 Outdoor washing lines are prohibited. 12 A landsite occupied by an integrated housing project must be surrounded by a fence or an evergreen fence that conforms to the applicable provisions in the present by-law. 13 All the provisions in the present by-law are applicable, among them those relative to an off-street parking area (Chapter 10) and to the landscaping of open spaces (Chapter 12). 14 The provisions listed under the items STRUCTURE and BUILDING, as well as the number of dwelling units per building (min/max) on the specifications chart, are applicable to each building in the integrated project. 15 The provisions relative to the area and the dimensions of the landsite, as well as the floor area ratio (F.A.R.) and the ratio of building footprint to site (B.F.S.) apply to all of the landsite on which the buildings in the integrated project are located SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A RAIL LINE A building occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group must be located at least 10 m from the easement for an existing or proposed rail line. When a building occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group is located, the following landscaping must be carried out on the side of the landsite adjacent to the rail line: grading and the installation of an embankment, a low wall, trees or shrubs, or an opaque fence, minimum 2 m in height. For the purposes of interpreting the present article, a building is also considered as being located bordering a rail line when it is less 100 m from the rail line and when it is separated from it by a thoroughfare or a park, or by a thoroughfare and a park MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ROWHOUSES The maximum number of rowhouses in one structure, occupied exclusively by a use in the Housing (h) group, is 6. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

145 129 SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP 124. MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING A main use in the Commercial (c) group may only be carried out on a landsite on which a closed main building is constructed, except for the uses Parking lot for heavy vehicles (4623) or Parking lot for cars (4621) NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS Only one main building is permitted per landsite, except when each building is occupied by a main use in the Commercial (c) that is part of an integrated commercial project authorized in virtue of the present by-law ZERO SETBACK FOR A LANDSITE ADJACENT TO A LANDSITE OCCUPIED OR INTENDED TO BE OCCUPIED BY A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP Notwithstanding the side setback prescribed in the specifications chart, when a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Commercial (c) group is adjacent, along the entire length of the side boundary, to a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Commercial (c) group, the side setback on this side of the landsite may be zero, on condition that the following requirements are met: 1 The width of the side setback prescribed in the specifications chart must be doubled on the side on which the side setback is not zero; 2 The side wall of the building on the side of the landsite with the zero setback must be constructed of masonry and must not contain any opening STANDARDS FOR INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL PROJECTS An integrated commercial or industrial project is authorized under the following conditions: 1 The integrated commercial or industrial project must have a minimum of two main buildings. Each part of the building that is part of a semi-detached or row-house building is considered to be a single main building. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

146 130 2 Each building in an integrated commercial project must have a maximum of 4 commercial establishments. At least 50% of the gross floor area of an integrated commercial project must be occupied by a use in the Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) sub-category of uses. 3 Each main building must be accessible from a street by way of an access aisle at least 6.5 m wide and covered in asphalt, concrete, concrete pavers or stone pavers, so that each building is accessible to emergency vehicles. 4 The siting of the main buildings must conform to the following provisions: a) The minimum distance between a main building and an access aisle corresponds to the minimum setback prescribed in the specifications chart; b) The minimum distance between a main building and a landsite boundary line is set as follows: When the landsite is adjacent to a park: 9 m. When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Industrial (I), except in the case of an integrated industrial project, or to a railway line: 30 m. When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Commercial (C) or Community (P) : 3 m, but never less than the height of the building in the integrated project. When the landsite is adjacent to a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (H) : 6 m, but never less than the height of the building in the integrated project multiplied by if the length of the wall parallel to this landsite boundary line is less than 60 m, or by 0.75 if the length of the wall is 60 m or more. c) The minimum distance between a main building and another main building in the integrated project is set as follows: Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

147 131 The minimum distance between two buildings must be equal to half the cumulative height of those two buildings. However, this distance must be increased by 25% if two walls or parts of walls of the buildings are parallel or almost parallel (with a maximum splay of 20%) over a length between 20 m and 60 m, and by 50% if the walls are parallel or almost parallel (with a maximum splay of 20%) over a length of more than 60 m. 5 The exterior cladding materials of all the buildings must be identical. 6 Communal detached signs are authorized in conformity with the provisions applicable in virtue of Chapter 19 for a commercial or industrial sign. 7 An access aisle longer than 90 m must end in a turning circle with a minimum diameter of 32 m. 8 All the provisions in the present by-law are applicable, among them those relative to an off-street parking area (Chapter 10) and to the landscaping of open spaces (Chapter 12). 9 The provisions listed under the items STRUCTURE and BUILDING, as well as the number of dwelling units per building (min/max) on the specifications chart are applicable to each building in the integrated project. 10 The provisions relative to the area and the dimensions of the landsite, as well as the floor area ratio (F.A.R.) and the ratio of building footprint to site (B.F.S.) apply to all of the landsite on which the buildings in the integrated project are located. SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL GROUP (I) 128. MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING A main use in the Industrial (i) group may only be carried out on a landsite on which a closed main building is constructed. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

148 NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS More than one main building per landsite occupied by a use in the Industrial (i) group is permitted only if this landsite is located in a zone in which the main occupational use is Industrial (i) ZERO SETBACK BORDERING A RAIL LINE When a landsite is occupied or intended to be occupied exclusively by a main use in the Industrial (i) group, and when the rear boundary line of this landsite is adjacent to the easement for an existing or proposed rail line, the rear setback applicable may be zero SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A DWELLING A building occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Industrial (i) group must be located at least 18 m from a main building occupied exclusively by a use in the Housing (h) group. The present article does not apply in the following cases: 1 When the use in the Housing (h) group is not authorized in the zone. 2 When the use in the Housing (h) group is located in a zone in which the main occupational use is not Housing (h) SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP 132. MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING A main use in the Institutions (p2) use category, except for the Cemetery (6242) use or in the Security and Defence (p3a) a use in sub-use category may only be carried out on a landsite on which the closed main building is constructed. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

149 NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS More than one main building per landsite occupied by a use in the Community (p) group is permitted only if this landsite is located in a zone in which the main occupational use is Commercial (c) or Community (p) SEPARATION DISTANCE BORDERING A RAIL LINE A building occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Institutions (p2) group must be located at least 10 m from the easement for an existing or proposed rail line. When a building is occupied or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Institutions (p2) group, the side of the landsite bordering the railway line must be landscaped with an embankment, soil grading, a low wall, tree or shrub planting or an opaque fence at least 2 m high. For the purposes of interpreting the present article, a building is considered as being located bordering a rail line when it is less than 100 m from the rail line and when it is separated from it by a thoroughfare or a park, or by a thoroughfare and a park. SECTION 7: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP 135. MAIN USE AND MAIN BUILDING A main use in the Recreation (r) group may only be carried out on a landsite on which a closed/completed main building is constructed, except for the use Golf course (no clubhouse or other sports facilities), Wilderness camping and picnic (7492), Ski station (downhill or crosscountry) (7513) or Hunting & fishing club (7514) or for the uses in the Off-trail extreme sports (r2) sub-use category NUMBER OF MAIN BUILDINGS More than one main building per landsite occupied by a use in the Recreational (r) group is permitted only if this landsite is located in a zone in which the main occupational use is Housing (h). For the case given in the first clause, all the main buildings must be occupied for the purpose of the same main use. Chapter 7 : Provisions relative to the siting and to the volume of a building or a structure

150 134 CHAPTER 8 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO USES, BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT AND PROJECTIONS INTO YARDS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS 137. INTERPRETING THE TABLES An accessory use, an accessory building, an accessory structure, a piece of accessory equipment or a projection of a main building is authorized in a yard only if it is listed in one of the tables in sections 2 to 6 of the present chapter and if the word YES appears, in the column for a given yard, on the line identifying this use, building, structure, piece of equipment or projection. This provision does not apply to an underground accessory use, accessory structure or piece of accessory equipment that is not apparent. The accessory use, accessory building, accessory structure, piece of accessory equipment or projection is subject to all the standards set out in the pertinent table as well as to any additional standard prescribed elsewhere in the present by-law, whether or not the table concerned refers to it. In the case of a conflict between a standard prescribed in one of the tables in the present chapter and a standard prescribed elsewhere in the by-law, the latter takes precedence. When a setback is mentioned in a table in the present chapter, this is the minimum setback applicable set out in the specifications chart of the zone in which the landsite is located or, as the case may be, the minimum setback calculated in accordance with the provisions in Chapter 7. When mention is made of an encroachment into a setback, this encroachment is measured from the setback prescribed in the specifications chart towards the boundary line. However, in the case of a building built inside the setback and protected by acquired rights, the encroachment is measured from the wall of the existing building. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

151 135 SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 138. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP The table that follows identifies and governs the accessory uses, accessory buildings, the pieces of accessory equipment and the projections from the main building that are authorized inside a yard for a main use in the Housing (h) group. Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 1. SIDEWALK, WALKWAY, LANDSCAPING, TREE, SHRUB, HEDGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2. FENCE, WALL OR RETAINING WALL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter INSTALLATION SERVING AS EXTERIOR LIGHTING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4. INSTALLATION SERVING AS AUTHORIZED SIGNAGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter RECREATIONAL EQUIPMENT ACCESSORY TO THE MAIN USE SUCH AS PLAYROUND EQUIPMENT No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable A playhouse is only authorized in the rear yard of a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category. The maximum area permitted is 14 m², the height may not exceed 4.5 m and it must be located at least 2 m from a street line. 6. SWING OR BASKETBALL NET Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

152 136 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 7. LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ENTRANCE TO OFF-STREET PARKING AREA OR DELIVERY AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See chapters 9, 10 and OFF-STREET PARKING AREA AND BICYCLE PARKING a) Other standards applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes See Chapter LOADING BAY, BERTH, DELIVERY AREA AND MANŒUVERING AREA No No No No No 10. PATIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11. FRONT PORCH, BALCONY, VERANDA, TERRACE OR COLD STORAGE ROOM THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into a setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1.8 m 1.8 m 1.8 m 3 m 3 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article 0 One cold storage room only is authorized. It must be located under a front porch, balcony, veranda, terrace or staircase and have the same dimensions. 12. COVERED DECK No Yes No Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into any setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m - 2 m 2 m m m 1.5 m 13. SOLARIUM (GLAZED ATRIUM) No Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

153 137 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Maximum encroachment into any setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 14. OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE PROVIDING ACCESS TO THE BASEMENT OR THE GROUND FLOOR a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 m - 3 m - 3 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line R (CA ; ) c) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP OR EXTERIOR ELEVATOR FOR A HANDICAPPED PERSON a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 16. EXTERIOR STAIRCASE OR EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP, PROVIDING ACCESS TO A LEVEL OTHER THAN THE BASEMENT OR GROUND FLOOR a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line No No No Yes Yes m 1 m b) Other standards applicable Only the Single-family dwelling (h1) and Two-family and three-family dwellings (h2) use categories may have a staircase leading to the 2 nd floor. 17. FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS Non Yes Yes Yes Yes 18. AWNING, BANNER, ROOF OR EAVES THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

154 138 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m b) Other standards applicable Notwithstanding the definition in Chapter 3, an awning may be supported by walls or columns when it serves to cover a terrace or patio in a rear yard. 19. CANOPY THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes No No No No 2 m PROJECTING WINDOW OR CANTILEVER THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into any yard b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m The minimum distance from a landsite boundary line is set at 1.5 m. c) Other standards applicable The maximum area is set at 1.5m CHIMNEY OR FIREPLACE, EITHER PROJECTING OR NOT INCORPORATED INTO THE BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into any yard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable The chimney or fireplace may not be wider than 2.5 m. 22. DETACHED ACCESSORY BUILDING OTHER THAN THAT TARGETED IN LINE 138 M ( CA ; ) Non Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Article 140 Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

155 139 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 23. WINTER SHELTER Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter POOL OR SPA, ACCESS STAIRS AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT TO THE POOL OR SPA a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line No Yes Yes Yes Yes m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m b) Other standards applicable See Article ACCESS PLATFORM FOR THE SWIMMING POOL ERECTED ABOVE THE GRADE LEVEL c) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line No Yes Yes Yes Yes m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m d) Other standards applicable See Article DOMESTIC DISH ANTENNA ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable See Article DOMESTIC DISH ANTENNA NOT ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No No No Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 2.5 m b) Maximum height measured from grade level at the base c) Minimum distance from a street line d) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other than a street line m 5 m m m 2 m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

156 140 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street e) Other standards applicable See Article DOMESTIC ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA a) Maximum height, measured from grade level at the base b) Minimum distance from a street line c) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other than a street line d) Maximum distance from the main building No Yes Yes Yes Yes - 25 m 25 m 25 m 25 m m - 6 m - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m e) Other standards applicable See Article WASTE STORAGE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other than a street line - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article RECYCLING STORAGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other than a street line b) Other standards applicable 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m See Article MAST AND ENTRY CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL POWER, OR A GAS, WATER OR ELECTRICITY METER, FOR A DETACHED OR SEMI- DETACHED DWELLING No Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

157 141 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Other standards applicable A distribution network for public utility services must be placed under ground. 32. MAST AND ENTRY CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL POWER, OR A GAS, WATER OR ELECTRICITY METER, FOR A ROW HOUSE a) Other standards applicable 33. GAS BOTTLE WITH A CAPACITY OF UP TO 9.1 KG 34. GAS CANISTER WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 KG a) Maximum number per landsite b) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street c) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other than a street line d) Minimum distance from a street line e) Maximum distance between a gas bottle or canister and the main building f) Other standards applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A distribution network for public utility services must be placed under ground. No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes m - 0 m - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m m - 6 m - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON THE GROUND SUCH AS A HEAT PUMP, AIR CONDITIONER OR COMPRESSOR No Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

158 142 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - b) Maximum distance between the equipment and the main building - c) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE BUILDING SUCH AS A HEAT PUMP, AIR CONDITIONER OR COMPRESSOR No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Article FIREWOOD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a side or rear boundary line 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m b) Other standards applicable The maximum area permitted in a front yard is 1.6 m 3 or 1.22 m high x 2.44 m long x 0.5 m deep. The maximum area permitted in a side or rear yard is 6 m WASHING LINE AND POST FOR A WASHING LINE No No No Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable A washing line, umbrella dryer or other type of line for outdoor clothes drying is authorized only on a landsite occupied by a use comprising less than 8 dwelling units and occupying a detached or semi-detached building with 2 storeys or less. 39. STORAGE OR PARKING OF A TRAILER LONGER THAN 3.66 M, A HEAVY VEHICLE OR A TOOL VEHICLE 40. STORAGE OR PARKING OF A TRAILER SHORTER THAN 3.66 M, EXCLUDING THE CONNECTION FITTING No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 41. UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION THAT IS NOT APPARENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

159 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A BUILDING THAT IS SEMI- DETACHED OR A ROW HOUSE OR THAT HAS A ZERO SIDE SETBACK Notwithstanding Article 0, in the case of a building that is semi-detached or a row house or with a zero side setback, a projection that is incorporated into a building, such as a porch, balcony, veranda, terrace, patio, exterior staircase, open exterior access ramp or exterior elevator for a handicapped person, may be located less than 1 m from the side boundary line when it is in the rear yard. In such a case, an opaque screen at least 1.5 m high and no more than 2 m high, measured from the level of the floor of the projection, must be installed for the entire width of the projection, from the edge of a party wall or wall of a building constructed with a zero side setback ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ACCESSORY BUILDINGS In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138, the following provisions apply to an accessory building detached from the main building: 1 General provisions applicable to all detached accessory buildings in all zones: a) No more than 2 accessory buildings are permitted per landsite, and not more than one accessory building of the same type. This provision does not include the numbers for private garages or carports authorized on a landsite. b) The minimum distance away from the main building is set at 2 m. c) Except when specified in the following paragraphs, the maximum permitted height of an accessory building is 4 m. d) When the accessory building is located in a side yard adjacent to a street or in a rear yard adjacent to a street, it must be hidden from the street by an opaque fence at least 1.5 m high and not more than 2.0 m high or by a dense evergreen hedge or an evergreen hedge at least 1.5 m high. 2 Specific provisions applicable to a private garage: M a) One private garage is permitted per landsite. It must be located at least 1 m from a landsite boundary line Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

160 144 b) The maximum permitted area of a private garage or is 45 m². In addition, if it is located in the rear yard, it may not exceed 50% of the area of this yard. c) The maximum interior dimensions of a private garage must be 2.75 m wide, 5.5 m deep and 2.1 m free height. d) The maximum height permitted, including the gable, is set at 4.5 m. e) A private garage must be linked to the public way by an access path in conformity with the provisions of the present by-law. (CA ; ) 3 Specific provisions applicable to a shed for the storage of household and garden equipment: a) The maximum height of a shed is set at 4 m and the maximum permitted area is 14 m². b) Notwithstanding the preceding sub-paragraph, the maximum permitted area of a shed is 28 m² if it is located on a landsite with an area larger than 1000 m². c) A shed must be located at least 30 cm away from a side or rear landsite boundary line. 4 Specific provisions applicable to a domestic greenhouse: a) The maximum area of a domestic greenhouse is set at 14 m². b) A domestic greenhouse must be located at least 2 m away from a side or rear landsite boundary line REQUIREMENTS RELATIVE TO A PRIVATE GARAGE OR A CARPORT ATTACHED TO OR INTEGRATED INTO A DWELLING N Provisions applicable to a private garage or a carport attached or integrated into a dwelling : a) One private garage or one attached or integrated carport is permitted per landsite. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

161 145 b) The interior dimensions of a private garage or the dimensions of the carport on the ground must be 2.75 m wide, 5.5 m deep and 2.1 m free height. c) The walls of the carport must be open on a minimum of two sides. For the application of the present provision, the columns, the finished floor level and the underside of the roof delineate the surface of a wall. d) Any carport that does not respect the provisions in the present paragraph or on which the entrance is closed by a private garage door is considered to be a private garage for the purposes of the by-law. e) Except in the case of a private garage serving a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category, a private garage attached to or integrated into a main building may not be located at a level lower than 20 cm below the finished level of the centre of the street facing the landsite on which the private garage is installed. In the case of a waterfront landsite, the floor level of the private garage must be 20 cm above the surrounding grade level. f) A private garage serving a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category must be located below ground and not be apparent. However, when it is bordering Rivière-des-Prairies, at 1 m from the landsite boundary lines and hidden by a screen of vegetation, the private garage may be apparent. (CA ; ) 141. REQUIREMENTS RELATIVE TO THE INSTALLATION OF A BELOW-GRADE GARAGE M Notwithstanding Article 140.1, a below-grade private garage incorporated into a dwelling is permitted subject to the following conditions: (CA ; ) 1 When it serves a Single-family dwelling (h1) use in a row-house structure or a Multifamily dwelling (h3) use, a below-grade garage is permitted only if it serves more than one dwelling unit; 2 The maximum permitted slope for the access to the basement is set at 10%; 3 An exterior drain must be installed at the bottom of the slope in such a way that storm water runs towards it; Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

162 146 4 There must be a difference in level of 0.75 cm between the bottom of the garage door in the semi-basement and the top of the exterior drain cover; 5 A speed bump must be installed at the top of the slope of a circulation aisle for a semibasement garage as illustrated for information purposes on the diagram identified in Appendix I ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE STORAGE OF GARBAGE OR MATERIALS FOR RECYCLING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138, the following provisions apply to an area for the storage of garbage or materials for recycling located outside a main building: 1 In the case of a building with 6 or more dwelling units or 10 or more rooms, a space must be reserved, inside or outside the building, for the storage of garbage and materials for recycling. The table that follows establishes the type of area authorized for the storage of garbage and materials for recycling, in terms of the total number of dwelling units in the building. When the word Yes appears on the line for the type of storage area, this type of storage area is authorized to serve a building containing the number of dwelling units or rooms shown in the corresponding column. Type of area authorized for the storage of garbage and materials for recycling Number of dwelling units or rooms per building 6 to 8 dwelling units or 10 to 17 rooms 9 to 23 dwelling units or 18 to 47 rooms 24 or more dwelling units or 48 or more rooms Garbage receptacle (container, bin) Yes No No Outdoor enclosure for containers or bins Yes Yes No Storage area inside the main building Yes Yes Yes 2 A storage area for garbage must not obstruct any emergency exit. 3 It is obligatory to use a storage area for garbage installed inside a main building. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

163 147 4 A garbage receptacle must be contiguous with a wall of the main building and be placed at least 6 m away from the main façade of the building. 5 A garbage container and a storage area inside the main building main building and serving a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category or Collective housing (h4) category with more than 6 dwelling units or more than 10 rooms must have a minimum volume of 0.57 m 3 per dwelling unit. 6 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be accessible by a circulation aisle with a street entrance. There must be an open space with a minimum length of 12 m in front of the door to the enclosure to allow the truck to park during the collection of garbage or materials for recycling. 7 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be installed on a concrete or asphalt surface and it must have a door that closes automatically. In addition, it must be surrounded on three sides by a minimum 1 m wide green strip planted with grass and shrubs. 8 The walls of the outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be at least as high as the garbage containers or bins so that they are not visible from the street or from a contiguous landsite located on the same street, but must not exceed 3 m or be less than 2 m in height. 9 The exterior cladding material on the outdoor enclosure must be treated wood or masonry. In the case of the construction of a wooden fence, it must consist of openwork over a maximum of 20% of its surface. 10 A door providing access to a storage area for garbage, whether indoors or outdoors, must be kept closed at all times and it must be fitted with an automatic door closer ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138, the following provisions apply to a swimming pool or spa: 1 The area of a swimming pool must not exceed one third of the area of the landsite on which it is installed. In addition, if it is located in a rear yard, it may not exceed 50% of the area of this yard. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

164 148 2 A swimming pool must be located at least 2m from the main building and more than 1 m from an accessory building. M (CA ; ) 3 All the directives relative to the installation of a swimming pool also apply to the installation of the equipment required for the operation of the pool, such as the filtration system, water heater, heat pump or gas tank, as well as to the installation of utility items such as a slide, springboard, steps or ladders. A patio or a terrace attached to the main building and providing direct access to the pool may be installed at a distance of 2 m from a rear boundary line. 4 A swimming pool or a spa must be surrounded by a fence with a minimum height of 1.5 m, placed at a minimum distance of 1 m from the edge of the pool or spa. The open space between the finished grade level and the underside of the fence must not exceed 5 cm. Except in the case of a chain link fence, the fence must be composed of vertical elements, and the maximum permitted distance between these elements is 10 cm. Any passage through the fence must be closed by a door fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device. 5 Paragraph 4 does not apply to an above-ground pool surrounded by an integrated fence if the height above grade of the pool wall or the integrated fence is at least 1.5 m. However, the following conditions apply: a) Any steps or ladders providing access to the pool must be surrounded by a fence and by a gate at least 1.5 m high, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; the provisions in paragraph 4 apply to this fence. b) Should the above-ground pool be accessible by a terrace or a patio connected to the ground by steps or stairs, access to the pool must be prevented by one of the following methods: the top of the stairs or steps must be closed by a gate with a minimum height of 1.5 m, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; a fence must be placed across the terrace, patio or platform so as to block access to the pool; the provisions paragraph 4 apply to this fence. 6 Paragraph 4 does not apply to a spa fitted with a lockable cover. When not in use, the spa must be covered and locked. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

165 149 7 Wastewater from the swimming pool must be emptied into the storm sewer, or with the aid of pumps, into drainage ditches ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DOMESTIC DISH ANTENNA OR A DOMESTIC ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138, the following provisions apply to a domestic dish antenna or a domestic antenna other than a dish antenna: 1 No more than one domestic antenna per dwelling unit or per 4 rooms for a main use that is part of the Collective housing (h4) use category may be installed on a landsite or on a building. 2 A domestic dish antenna attached to a building must not obstruct an opening or be installed in front of an opening to the building. 3 A domestic dish antenna not attached to the main building and located in a yard adjacent to a street must be hidden from the street by an opaque fence or a wall at least 1.5 m high and not exceeding 2.5 m high or by a dense, evergreen or coniferous hedge of the same height ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A GAS BOTTLE OR CANISTER WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 KG In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138, a bottle or tank of gas with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg must be hidden by an opaque fence at least 1.5 m high and not exceeding 2.5 m high or by a dense evergreen hedge or an evergreen hedge of the same height, unless it is located in a rear yard not adjacent to a street. A tank for liquid heating fuel (oil or gas) is prohibited on a landsite occupied by a use in the Housing (h) group SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of the first clause and of Article 138 the following provisions apply to mechanical equipment installed on the ground or on the building, such as a heat pump, an air conditioner or a compressor; Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

166 150 1 Mechanical equipment must be surrounded by an acoustic, opaque screen with exterior cladding composed of a material authorized in virtue of Chapter 14 if it is located at a distance of less than 2.0 metres from a landsite boundary line. 2 At no time must mechanical equipment be visible from the street. 3 The mechanical equipment must be maintained and kept in a good state of repair at all times SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING APPLICABLE TO SUBGROUP OF USES MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) AND COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4) N In spite of the contrary provisions applicable in virtue of Article 138 and 146, the following provisions apply to a mechanical equipment of split-system type installed on the ground or a mechanical equipment of type split-system installed on the balcony of a building such as a heat pump, an air conditioner or a compressor; A mechanical equipment of split-system type is permitted in the front yard of a building under the following conditions; a) The mechanical equipment of split-system type must be installed on a balcony or a patio only. b) When the mechanical equipment of split-system type lays on the ground, it must not be visible from the street. c) The mechanical equipment of split-system type must be maintained and kept in a good state of repair at all times. d) The mechanical equipment must be installed professionally. For application purposes of the present article, a split-system unit is a mechanical equipment consisting of a unit located outside the building and another inside linked together by a refrigerated duct. (CA ; ) Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

167 151 SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS 147. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS The table that follows identifies and governs accessory uses, accessory buildings, accessory structures, accessory equipment and projections of the main building that are authorized in a yard for a main use in the Commercial (c) or Recreational (r) group. Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 1. SIDEWALK, WALKWAY, LANDSCAPING, TREE, SHRUB, HEDGE 2. FENCE, WALL OR RETAINING WALL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter INSTALLATION SERVING AS EXTERIOR LIGHTING 4. INSTALLATION SERVING AS AUTHORIZED SIGNAGE a) Other standards applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes See Chapter RECREATIONAL AND SPORTS EQUIPMENT FOR CLIENTS OR EMPLOYEES OF THE RECREATIONAL OR COMMERCIAL ESTABLISHMENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 3 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 6. LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ENTRANCE TO OFF-STREET PARKING AREA OR DELIVERY AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See chapters 9, 10 et OFF-STREET PARKING AREA AND BICYCLE PARKING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter LOADING BAY, BERTH AND UNLOADING AREA, INCLUDING THE MANŒUVERING AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter PORCH, BALCONY, VERANDA, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

168 152 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street TERRACE, PATIO OR COLD STORAGE ROOM INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING, EXCEPT A COMMERCIAL FOOD SERVICE TERRACE a) Maximum encroachment into a setback b) Minimum distance from a 1.8 m 1.8 m 1.8 m 3 m 3 m 1 m 2 m 2 m 1 m 1 m landsite boundary line c) Other standards applicable See Article 0 One cold storage room only is authorized. It must be located under a front porch, balcony, veranda, terrace or staircase and have the same dimensions. 10. COMMERCIAL FOOD SERVICE TERRACE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other 3 m 3 m 3 m 3 m 3 m than a street line b) Minimum distance from a street line 4 m - 4 m - 4 m c) Other standards applicable See articles 148 and SOLARIUM (GLAZED ATRIUM) No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m c) Other standards applicable See Article COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP OR EXTERIOR ELEVATOR FOR A HANDICAPPED PERSON a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 14. OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE PROVIDING ACCESS TO THE BASEMENT OR THE GROUND FLOOR a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 m - 3 m - 3 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

169 153 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street c) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE OR EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP, PROVIDING ACCESS TO A LEVEL OTHER THAN THE BASEMENT OR GROUND FLOOR No No No No No 16. FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS No Yes Yes Yes Yes 17. AWNING, BANNER, ROOF OR EAVES INCORPORATED INTO THE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MAIN BUILDING, EXCEPT FOR A CANOPY SHELTERING GAS PUMPS a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 18. PROJECTING WINDOW OR CANTILEVER INCORPORATED INTO A BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into a setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 19. CHIMNEY OR FIREPLACE, PROJECTING OR NOT PROJECTING, INCORPORATED INTO THE BUILDING 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable The chimney or fireplace must not be wider than 2.5 m. 20. ACCESSORY BUILDING OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED IN LINES 22, No No No Yes Yes AND 38 a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article ENCLOSURE FOR SHOPPING CARTS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m b) Other standards applicable See Article PERGOLA, SUMMERHOUSE, KIOSK OR GAZEBO No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street m - 2 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m c) Maximum height m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m d) Other standards applicable See Article 151 Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

170 154 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 23. SWIMMING POOL OR SPA AND ACCESSORIES No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a street line m - 5 m e) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other - 2 m 2 m 1.5 m 1.5 m than a street line b) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA NOT ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No No No Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 2.5 m b) Maximum height, measured from grade level at the base m 5 m c) Minimum distance from a street line m d) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other m 2 m than a street line e) Other standards applicable See Article ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum height, measured from grade level at the base - 25 m 25 m 25 m 25 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article GARBAGE STORAGE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article GAS, WATER OR ELECTRICITY METER, MAST OR ENTRY CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL POWER a) Other standards applicable No Yes Yes Yes Yes A distribution network for public utility services must be placed underground. 29. GAS BOTTLE OR TANK WITH A CAPACITY OF LESS THAN 9.1 KG Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Article 155 Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

171 155 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 30. GAS BOTTLE OR TANK WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes KG OR LIQUID FUEL TANK a) Maximum number per landsite 1 b) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m c) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 6 m 6 m 6 m 6 m d) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SUCH AS HEAT PUMP (EXCEPT A SWIMMING POOL HEAT PUMP), AIR CONDITIONER OR COMPRESSOR No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m b) Maximum distance between the equipment and the main - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m building c) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON A BUILDING No Yes Yes Yes Yes SUCH AS A HEAT PUMP (EXCEPT A SWIMMING POOL HEAT PUMP) OR COMPRESSOR a) Other standards applicable See Article GATEHOUSE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum height 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m b) Other standards applicable See Article OUTDOOR DISPLAY Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Article OUTDOOR STORAGE See Article GAS PUMP FOR FILLING THE TANK OF A VEHICLE, ASSOCIATED WITH AN ESTABLISHMENT No Yes No Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m - 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article CANOPY TO SHELTER FUEL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

172 156 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street PUMPS, ASSOCIATED OR NOT ASSOCIATED WITH A BUILDING a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 4 m 4 m 4 m 4 m 4 m b) Other standards applicable See Article RETAIL SALE FUEL PUMP ISLAND AND CABIN FOR ATTENDANT OR CASHIER Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 7 m 7 m 7 m 7 m 7 m b) Other standards applicable See Article NON-APPARENT UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 148. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR WITH A ZERO SIDE SETBACK Notwithstanding Article 0, in the case of a semi-detached or rowhouse building or one with a zero side setback, a projection that is incorporated into a building, such as a porch, balcony, veranda, terrace, food service terrace, exterior staircase, open exterior access ramp or exterior elevator for a handicapped person, may be located less than 1 m from the side boundary line when it is in the rear yard. In such a case, an opaque screen at least 1.5 m high and no more than 2 m high, measured from the level of the floor of the projection, must be installed for the entire width of the projection, from the edge of a party wall or wall of a building constructed with a zero side setback ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A COMMERCIAL FOOD SERVICE TERRACE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to a commercial food service terrace: 1 A food service terrace is permitted only as an accessory structure or use to a main use in the Food service (c2d) or Licensed establishments and dance halls (c4b) subcategories of uses. 2 The terrace must be contiguous with the premises occupied by the establishment that it serves. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

173 157 3 The terrace must not occupy a yard contiguous with a landsite occupied by a use in the Housing (h) group. This provision does not apply if the use in the Housing (h) group Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

174 158 of uses is non-conforming or is located in a zone in which the main land use occupation is not Housing (h). 4 A terrace must be separated from the public thoroughfare by a screen, fence, planting box or otherwise, to a maximum height of 1.5 m. 5 The terrace may be used only for the consumption and serving of food and beverages. 6 The presentation of a show, dancing or similar event is not authorized on the terrace. In addition, loud speakers or any other sound amplification device may not be installed on the terrace outside the main building. 7 The terrace must not occupy a circulation aisle or an off-street parking area required in virtue of the provisions in the present by-law. 8 The places available on the food service terrace must not be taken into consideration when calculating the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for the main use. 9 An access between the building and the terrace is obligatory, and this access must be free of obstacles. 10 A removable fabric awning, banner or canopy to protect the terrace is authorized on the following conditions: a) It may be installed only during the period from March 31 to November 30 of the same year; b) It must be made of incombustible, flame-retardant materials; c) Run-off from the roof must fall at least 0.5 m from any landsite boundary line ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to a commercial greenhouse: 1 A greenhouse is only permitted as an accessory structure or accessory use to a main use in the Retail sale of landscaping and gardening articles and accessories (536), Retail sale Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

175 159 of flowers (florist) (5991) or Retail sale of construction (5212) sub-categories of uses. Except where specified in the paragraphs for specific provisions, the maximum height permitted for a greenhouse may not exceed that of the main building ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to an accessory building: 1 A winter shelter is not authorized as an accessory building for a use in the Commercial (c) and Recreational (r) groups. 2 The height of the accessory building may not exceed the height of the main building. 3 For a main use in the Commercial (c) group, the footprints of all the detached accessory buildings combined may not exceed 30% of the area of the rear yard, or exceed 50% of the area of the footprint of the main building. 4 For a main use in the Recreational (r) group, the footprints of all the detached accessory buildings combined may not exceed 10% of the area of the landsite. 5 Notwithstanding Article 0, when the accessory building is located on a landsite that is adjacent, over the entire length of the side boundary line, to a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Industrial (i) group, the distance between the accessory building and the side boundary line on that side may be zero, on condition that the distance on the other side is doubled. 6 Notwithstanding Article 0, when the landsite on which the accessory building is installed is adjacent to an occupied or intended to be occupied landsite by a use in the Housing (h) group, the distance between the accessory building and the side boundary line on that side must be at least 6 m. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

176 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ENCLOSURE FOR SHOPPING CARTS In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to an enclosure intended for the storage of shopping carts: 1 An enclosure for shopping carts must have one side open to allow access to the carts and be closed on the three other sides by a fence or a wall not more than 1.2 m high. 2 An enclosure for shopping carts must be located inside an off-street parking area, but must not occupy a parking space required in virtue of the provisions in the present by-law. 3 An enclosure for shopping carts is not considered as being an accessory building ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to a swimming pool or spa: 1 The area of a swimming pool must not exceed one third of the area of the landsite on which it is installed. In addition, if it is located in a rear yard, it may not exceed 50% of the area of this yard. 2 A swimming pool or spa must be located at least 2.4 m from the main building and more than 1 m from an accessory building. 3 All the directives relative to the installation of a swimming pool also apply to the installation of a terrace or patio not attached to the main building and providing access to the swimming pool, to the installation of the equipment required for the operation of the pool, such as the filtration system, water heater, heat pump or gas tank, as well as to the installation of utility items such as a slide, springboard, steps or ladders. A patio or a terrace attached to the main building and providing direct access to the pool may be installed at a distance of 2 m from a rear boundary line. 4 A swimming pool or a spa must be surrounded by a fence with a minimum height of 1.5 m, placed at a minimum distance of 1 m from the edge of the pool or spa. The open space between the finished grade level and the underside of the fence must not exceed 5 cm. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

177 161 Except in the case of a chain link fence, the fence must be composed of vertical elements, and the maximum permitted distance between these elements is 10 cm. Any passage through the fence must be closed by a door fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device. 5 Paragraph 4 does not apply to an above-ground pool surrounded by an integrated fence if the height above grade of the pool wall or the integrated fence is at least 1.5 m. However, the following conditions apply: a) Any steps or ladders providing access to the pool must be surrounded by a fence and by a gate at least 1.5 m high, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; the provisions in Paragraph 3 apply to this fence. b) Should the above-ground pool be accessible by a terrace or a patio connected to the ground by steps or stairs, access to the pool must be prevented by one of the following methods: the top of the stairs or steps must be closed by a gate with a minimum height of 1.5 m, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; a fence must be placed across the terrace, patio or platform so as to block access to the pool; the provisions in paragraph 4 apply to this fence. 6 Paragraph 4 does not apply to a spa fitted with a lockable cover. When not in use, the spa must be covered and locked. 7 An in ground swimming pool must be entirely surrounded by a sidewalk, including the minimum 0.76 m wide parapet wall ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to a dish antenna or an antenna other than a dish antenna: Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

178 162 1 Only one antenna may be installed per main building. When the building is also occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group, this provision does not apply to the main use in the Housing (h) group. 2 A dish antenna attached to a building must not obstruct an opening or be installed in front of an opening to the building. 3 A parabolic antenna, not attached to the main building, located in a yard adjacent to a street must be hidden from the street by an opaque fence or a wall not less than 1.5 m and not more than 2.5 m high or by a dense hedge of evergreen shrubs or evergreens of the same height ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN OUTDOOR DISPLAY In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to an outdoor display: 1 Only the following types of outdoor display are permitted: a) Outdoor display of fruits and vegetables; b) Outdoor display of flowers, shrubs and trees, and landscaping and gardening articles and accessories; c) Outdoor display of gas canisters; d) Outdoor display of vehicles; e) Outdoor display of products related to safety and promotion, and outdoor display of bags of ice; f) Machines for the automatic dispensing of products; g) Outdoor display of retail products or rental equipment; h) Outdoor display of recreational vehicles, motorcycles, snowmobiles and their accessories. i) Outdoor display of utility trailers with a load inferior than 2300 kg and of trucks. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

179 163 2 The outdoor display for fruits, vegetables, flowers, shrubs, trees, articles and accessories for landscaping and gardening is authorized under the following conditions: a) This type of display is authorized only for a main use for a retail store selling food products (54) Retail sale (florist) (5991), Retail sale of hardware (5251) and Retail sale of articles and accessories for landscaping and gardening; b) The area in which products related to retail sales are displayed must be at a maximum distance of 4 m from the main building; c) The overall area of any products displayed must be located at least 3m from a property line; d) The display area must be constructed with display cases specially designed for this purpose, and not with storage pallets or similar installations; e) The height which the products are displayed must not exceed 2 m high; f) The area in which the products are stored can be located within an off street parking space without impeding on a space required by the present by-law. 3 The outdoor display of fruits, vegetables, flowers, shrubs and trees, and landscaping and gardening articles and accessories for stores with a gross floor area greater than 1400 m 2 is authorized under the following conditions: a) This type of display is authorized for the following main uses only: Retail sale of landscaping and gardening articles and accessories (536) as main uses; A main use retail hardware store (5251) a main use in the sub-use category Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) ; Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

180 164 b) The area of the space in which the products are displayed may not exceed 15% of the gross floor area occupied by the establishment; c) The area in which the products are displayed must be at least 3 m from a landsite boundary line; d) The overall height of any products displayed must not exceed 2 m; e) Except for the display area at a maximum distance of 4.0 m from the main building, the area in which the products are displayed or storage must be delineated by an openwork fence with a maximum height of 2 m; f) The display area at a maximum distance of 4.0 m from the main building must be constructed with display cases specially designed for this purpose, and not with storage pallets or similar installations; g) The area in which the products are displayed may be located inside an off-street parking area but not encroach onto a space required in virtue of the present bylaw. h) The outdoor storage of soil, crushed stone, sand and any other similar material is permitted only in bags with a maximum capacity of 50 kg; i) A single modular building, a marquee or a kiosk is authorized as an accessory building to serve the outdoor display under the following conditions: the accessory building may be installed from May 1 to November 15 of the same year, inclusively; the accessory building must not encroach onto the minimum setbacks prescribed in the specifications chart. 4 The outdoor display of gas canisters intended for retail sale, rental or exchange is authorized under the following conditions : Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

181 165 a) This type of display is authorized only for uses in the Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) and Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) categories of uses; b) The capacity of each canister may not exceed 9.1 kg; c) The canisters must be placed inside a wire display cage fitted with a locking device. This display must be fixed to and be contiguous with the main building; d) The number of canisters may not exceed 30; e) Notwithstanding Article 0, the space in which the canisters are displayed may not be located in a rear yard or in a rear yard adjacent to a street; f) The area of the ground space used for the outdoor display may not exceed 5% of the gross floor area occupied by the establishment; g) The cage in which the canisters are displayed must be at least 1.5 m from a street line. 5 The outdoor display of vehicles intended for sale or rented is authorized under the following conditions: a) This type of display is authorized only for a main use that is part of the sub-use category Rental services for, and retail sale of motorized vehicles and recreational vehicles, except for heavy vehicles (c3c) or for the use Retail sale of new and used heavy vehicles (5597) ; b) The space for the display of the vehicles is authorized in the front and side yards. When the space is in the front yard, it may not occupy more than 50% of the front yard of the main building; c) The space for the display of the vehicles must be at least 3 m from a street line, and at least 1.5 m from any other landsite boundary line; d) A minimum 2 m wide grass strip must be installed between the display space for the vehicles and any street line; Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

182 166 e) The space for the display of the vehicles must not occupy an off-street parking space required in virtue of the provisions in the present by-law or a circulation aisle, and it must be paved. 6 The outdoor display of products related to maintenance, safety and promotion, of products in automatic dispensing machines and of bags of ice is authorized under the following conditions: a) This type of display is authorized only for a main use in the Retail sales and services (c1), Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) and Services for motorized vehicles, except for heavy vehicles, or for recreational vehicles (c3b) categories; b) All products related to maintenance, safety and promotion must be displayed inside a display case occupying a footprint of 3 m²; c) The number of display cases is set as follows: A single display case placed near the main building; A single display case per fuel pump island and located on this island. d) A freezer containing bags of ice and machines for the automatic dispensing of products is authorized on condition that they are adjacent to the main building. 7 The outdoor display of products related to the retail sale or rental of tools and equipment and to the retail sale of recreational vehicles, motorcycles and snowmobiles is authorized under the following conditions: a) This type of display is authorized only for a main use that is part of the sub-use category Retail sale of hardware (5251) Rental of tools and equipment (6352), Retail sale of recreational vehicles and touring trailers (5595) and Retail sale of motorcycles, snowmobiles and their accessories (5594). The space for the display of retail sale products or rental must be at a maximum distance of 4.0 m from the main building; Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

183 167 b) The area in which the products are displayed may be located inside an off-street parking lot as long as it does not encroach upon a parking space required in virtue of the present by-law ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN AREA FOR GARBAGE STORAGE M In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, the following provisions apply to an area for garbage storage: 1 A space must be reserved inside or outside a building for garbage storage. The following table sets out the type of garbage storage authorized: 1. Retail sale or on-site preparation of food products (fish store, butcher shop, fresh produce market, restaurant, cafeteria, etc.) use, including without limitations all commercial stores generating garbage of putrescible matter. Garbage storage for the uses in the Commercial (c) or Recreational (r) group Storage area inside the main building Storage area must be refrigerated A container or bin outside is authorized 2. All other commercial uses or uses in the Recreational (r) group Outdoor container or bin enclosure Storage area inside the main building. 2 When an area for garbage storage is required or located inside a building, this area must be used for storing garbage. 3 Storage of garbage must not obstruct any emergency exit. 4 When several establishments occupy a building with 2 storeys or more, the garbage storage area may be shared, on condition that the minimum volume required for each of the uses is in conformity with the provisions in the present by-law. 5 An area for garbage storage required for a retail sale or on-site preparation of food products (fish store, butcher shop, fresh produce market, restaurant, cafeteria, etc.) use, including without limitations all commercial stores generating garbage of putrescible matter, must have a volume of 1.8 m 3 for every 100 m² of floor area of the use it serves, with the minimum volume being 2.4 m 3. For all other uses, the storage area must have a Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

184 168 volume of 0.9 m 3 per 100 m² of floor area of the use it serves, with the minimum volume being 2.4 m 3. 6 An area for garbage storage can have an inferior volume requested by the preceding paragraph if it is equipped with a garbage compactor. 7 A shelter for garbage storage must be contiguous to a wall of the main building and be set back at least 6 m from the main façade of the building. 8 All outside garbage container or bin must be completely surrounded by an enclosure. 9 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be accessible by a circulation aisle with a street entrance. There must be an open space with a minimum length of 12 m in front of the door to the enclosure to allow the truck to park during the collection of garbage or materials for recycling. 10 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be installed on a concrete or asphalt surface and it must have a door that closes automatically. 11 The walls of the outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be at least as high as the garbage containers or bins so that they are not visible from the street or from a contiguous landsite located on the same street, but must not exceed 3 m or be less than 2 m in height. 12 The exterior cladding material on the outdoor enclosure must be of a material authorized by the by-law for a main building. (CA ; ) 157. SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANISTER OR TANK FOR GAS FUEL WITH A CAPACITY OF MORE THAN 9.1 KG OR TO A LIQUID FUEL TANK In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, except for the main uses of Storage centre and distribution network for natural gas (4862) or Storage centre and distribution network for petroleum (3715), a gas canister or tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg or a liquid gas tank that is located in a side yard adjacent to a street or in a rear yard adjacent to a street must be hidden by an opaque screen or a wall at least 1.5 m up to maximum Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

185 m high or by a dense, evergreen hedge, or of evergreens of the same height. R Notwithstanding Article 147, the following provisions apply to a gas canister or tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg or a liquid gas tank: 1 The number of liquid gas tanks on a landsite is unlimited for the main use of Storage centre and distribution network for petroleum (3715). 2 The number of gas canisters or tanks with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg for a landsite is unlimited for the main use of Storage centre and distribution network for natural gas (4862). 3 A liquid gas tank used to provide fuel to a vehicle or a fleet of vehicles must be underground. 4 A gas canister or tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg must be located at a minimum distance of 20 m from the boundary of a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (h) SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of the first clause and of Article 147, mechanical equipment installed on the ground or on a building, such as a heat pump (except a swimming pool heat pump), an air conditioner or a compressor, must be entirely surrounded by an acoustic, opaque screen with exterior cladding composed of a material authorized in virtue of Chapter 14. The mechanical equipment must be maintained and kept in a good state of repair at all times SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING (CA ; ) Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

186 PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE OUTDOOR STORAGE OF A VEHICLE The following provisions apply to the outdoor storage of a vehicle: 1 The outdoor storage of a commercial vehicle or a car that is part of a fleet of cars, including a vehicle intended for rental is authorized. This outdoor storage may be in the side or rear yard, adjacent or not adjacent to a street. The vehicle must be associated with the activities of an establishment located on the same landsite. 2 The maximum number of commercial vehicles that may be stored on a landsite is 3. 3 For a main use included under code 57 - Retail sale of furniture, home furnishings and appliances or a main use in the Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale businesses and para-industrial services (c5) use category, the outdoor storage of a vehicle is authorized. This outdoor storage may be in all yards, with the exception of a tool vehicle. In the case of a tool vehicle, the outdoor storage is authorized only in a yard not adjacent to a street. The vehicle must be associated with the activities of an establishment located on the same landsite that the activity for which the vehicle is used must arise from the main use, or from an additional use or a dependent use for this main use SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANOPY THAT FORMS A SHELTER FOR GAS PUMPS In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, a canopy that forms a shelter for gas pumps may be higher than the main building it serves SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CABIN FOR A GAS PUMP ATTENDANT OR A CASHIER In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 147, only one cabin for a gas pump attendant or cashier may be installed on a landsite occupied by a use in the Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) category. The cabin must be less than 18m² in area, and be either the same height as the main building or 6 m, whichever is lower. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

187 171 SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP 163. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP The following table identifies and governs the accessory uses, accessory buildings, accessory structures, accessory equipment for, and the projections of the main building that are authorized in a yard for a main use in the Industrial (i) group. Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Font Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 1. SIDEWALK, WALKWAY, LANDSCAPING, TREE, SHRUB, HEDGE 2. FENCE, WALL OR RETAINING WALL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter INSTALLATION SERVING AS EXTERIOR OR SURVEILLANCE LIGHTING 4. INSTALLATION SERVING AS AUTHORIZED SIGNAGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter RECREATIONAL AND SPORTS EQUIPMENT INTENDED FOR THE CLIENTS OR EMPLOYEES OF THE INDUSTRIAL FACILITY a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 1.5 m 6. LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ENTRANCE TO OFF-STREET PARKING AREA OR DELIVERY AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See chapters 9,10 and OFF-STREET PARKING AREA OR BICYCLE PARKING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter LOADING BAY, BERTH, DELIVERY AREA AND MANŒUVERING AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

188 172 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Font Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Other standards applicable See Chapter FRONT PORCH, BALCONY, VERANDA, TERRACE OR COLD STORAGE ROOM THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 1.8 m 1.8 m 1.8 m 3 m 3 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 1 m 2 m 2 m 1 m 1 m c) Other standards applicable See Article 0 One cold storage room only is authorized. It must be located under a front porch, balcony, veranda, terrace or staircase and have the same dimensions. 10. OPEN EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP OR EXTERIOR ELEVATOR FOR A HANDICAPPED PERSON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROVIDING ACCESS TO THE BASEMENT OR THE GROUND FLOOR a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street 3 m - 3 m - 3 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE OR EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP, PROVIDING ACCESS TO A LEVEL No No No No No OTHER THAN THE BASEMENT OR GROUND FLOOR 13. FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS No Yes Yes Yes Yes 14. AWNING, BANNER, ROOF OR EAVES INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m b) Other standards applicable See Article PROJECTING WINDOW OR CANTILEVER INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into a setback Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

189 173 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Font Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 16. CHIMNEY OR FIREPLACE, EITHER PROJECTING OR NOT INCORPORATED INTO THE BUILDING 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m setback b) Other standards applicable The chimney or fireplace may not be wider than 2.5 m. 17. ACCESSORY BUILDING OTHER THAN THAT LISTED IN LINE No No No Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA NOT ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No No No Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 2.5 m b) Maximum height measured from grade level at the base m 5 m c) Minimum distance from a street line m d) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other m 2 m than a street line e) Other standards applicable See Article ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum height measured from grade level at the base - 25 m 25 m 25 m 25 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article GARBAGE STORAGE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article GAS, WATER OR ELECTRICITY METER; MAST AND ENTRY CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL POWER No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable A distribution network for public utility services must be placed under ground. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

190 174 Authorized use, building, structure or accessory equipment and projection for the main building Font Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 23. GAS CANISTER OR LIQUID FUEL TANK No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 6 m 6 m 6 m 6 m c) Other standards applicable See Article SILO AND TANK FOR SOLIDS OR LIQUIDS OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED IN LINE 23 a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 25. FUEL PUMP FOR FUELING A VEHICLE ASSOCIATED WITH THE INDUSTRIAL FACILITY No Yes Yes Yes Yes - 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m No Yes No Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m - 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING SUCH AS A HEAT PUMP OR COMPRESSOR a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line b) Maximum distance between the equipment and the main building No Yes Yes Yes Yes - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article GATEHOUSE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Article OUTDOOR STORAGE See article UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION THAT IS NOT APPARENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

191 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR TO A ZERO SIDE SETBACK Notwithstanding Article 0, in the case of a semi-detached or rowhouse building or one with a zero side setback, a projection that is incorporated into a building, such as a porch, balcony, veranda, terrace, exterior staircase, open exterior access ramp or exterior elevator for a handicapped person, may be located less than 1 m from the side boundary line when it is in the rear yard. In such a case, an opaque screen at least 1.5 m high and no more than 2 m high, measured from the level of the floor of the projection, must be installed for the entire width of the projection, from the edge of a party wall or wall of a building constructed with a zero side setback ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 163, the following provisions apply to an accessory building: 1 A winter shelter is not authorized as an accessory building for a use in the Industrial (i) group; 2 The height of an accessory building may not exceed the maximum height prescribed for the main building in the specifications chart; 3 The number of accessory buildings is unlimited ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 163, the following provisions apply to a dish antenna or an antenna other than a dish antenna: 1 No more than one antenna may be installed per main building. 2 A dish antenna attached to a building must not obstruct an opening or be installed in front of an opening to the building. 3 A dish antenna, not attached to the main building, located in a yard adjacent to a street must be hidden from the street by an opaque fence or a wall not less than 1.5 m and not Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

192 176 more than 2.5 m high or by a dense hedge or of evergreens of the same height ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN AREA FOR GARBAGE STORAGE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 163, the following provisions apply to an area for garbage storage: 1 A space must be reserved inside or outside a building for garbage storage. The following are the types of garbage storage authorized: a) An outdoor enclosure for containers or bins; b) Storage area inside the main building. 2 When an area for garbage storage is required or located inside a building, this area must be used for storing garbage. 3 When several establishments occupy a building with 2 storeys or more, the garbage storage area may be shared, on condition that the minimum volume required for each of the uses is in conformity with the provisions in the present by-law. 4 An area for garbage storage must have a volume of 0.9 m 3 per 100 m² of floor area of the use it serves, with the minimum volume being 2.4 m 3. 5 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be accessible by a circulation aisle with a street entrance. There must be an open space with a minimum length of 12 m in front of the door to the enclosure to allow the truck to park during the collection of garbage or materials for recycling. 6 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be installed on a concrete or asphalt surface and it must have a door that closes automatically. In addition, it must be surrounded on three sides by a minimum 1 m wide green strip planted with grass and shrubs. 7 The walls of the outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be at least as high as the garbage containers or bins so that they are not visible from the street or from a contiguous landsite located on the same street, but must not exceed 3 m or be less than 2 m in height. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

193 177 8 The exterior cladding material on the outdoor enclosure must be a material authorized for a main building SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A GAS CANISTER OR A GAS OR LIQUID GAS TANK Notwithstanding Article 163, the following provisions apply to a gas canister or to a gas or liquid gas tank: 1 A liquid gas tank for fuelling a vehicle or a fleet of vehicles must be underground. 2 A gas canister or tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg must be located at least 20 m from the boundary of a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (h) SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of the first clause and of Article 163, mechanical equipment installed on the ground or on a building, such as a heat pump (except a swimming pool heat pump), an air conditioner or a compressor, must be entirely surrounded by an acoustic, opaque screen with exterior cladding composed of a material authorized in virtue of Chapter 14. The mechanical equipment must be maintained and kept in a good state of repair at all times PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE OUTDOOR STORAGE OF A VEHICLE The following provisions apply to the outdoor storage of a vehicle: 1 The outdoor storage of a commercial vehicle or a car that is part of a fleet of cars, including a vehicle intended for rental is authorized. This outdoor storage may be in the side or rear yard, adjacent or not adjacent to a street. The vehicle must be associated with the activities of an establishment located on the same landsite. 2 The maximum number of commercial vehicles that may be stored on a landsite is 3. 3 For a main use included under code 57 - Retail sale of furniture, home furnishings and appliances or a main use in the Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

194 178 businesses and para-industrial services (c5) use category, the outdoor storage of a vehicle is authorized. This outdoor storage may be in all yards, with the exception of a tool vehicle. In the case of a tool vehicle, the outdoor storage is authorized only in a yard not adjacent to a street. The vehicle must be associated with the activities of an establishment located on the same landsite that the activity for which the vehicle is used must arise from the main use, or from an additional use or a dependent use for this main use. SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP 171. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP The following table identifies and governs the accessory uses, accessory buildings, accessory structures, accessory equipment and the projections of the main building that are authorized in a yard for a main use in the Community (p) group. Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 1. SIDEWALK, WALKWAY, LANDSCAPING, TREE, SHRUB, HEDGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2. FENCE, WALL OR RETAINING WALL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter INSTALLATION SERVING AS EXTERIOR LIGHTING 4. INSTALLATION SERVING AS AUTHORIZED SIGNAGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ENTRANCE TO OFF-STREET PARKING AREA OR DELIVERY AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See chapters 9, 10 and 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6. OFF-STREET PARKING AREA AND BICYCLE PARKING a) Other standards applicable See Chapter LOADING BAY, BERTH, DELIVERY AREA AND MANŒUVERING AREA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter 11 Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

195 179 Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 8. FRONT PORCH, BALCONY, VERANDA, TERRACE OR COLD STORAGE ROOM THAT IS INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING, EXCEPT FOR A FOOD SERVICE TERRACE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 1.8 m 1.8 m 1.8 m 3 m 3 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 1 m 2 m 2 m 1 m 1 m c) Other standards applicable See Article 172 One cold storage room only is authorized. It must be located under a front porch, balcony, veranda, terrace or staircase and have the same dimensions. 9. FOOD SERVICE TERRACE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other 3 m 3 m 3 m 3 m 3 m than a street line b) Minimum distance from a street line 4 m - 4 m - 4 m c) Other standards applicable See articles 172 and OPEN EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP OR EXTERIOR ELEVATOR FOR A DISABLED PERSON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 11. OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE OR EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP, PROVIDING ACCESS TO THE BASEMENT OR GROUND FLOOR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line c) Other standards applicable See Article OPEN EXTERIOR STAIRCASE OR EXTERIOR ACCESS RAMP, PROVIDING ACCESS TO A LEVEL OTHER THAN THE BASEMENT OR GROUND FLOOR 3 m - 3 m - 3 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m No No No No No 13. FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS No Yes Yes Yes Yes 14. AWNING, BANNER, ROOF OR EAVES INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m 0.75 m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

196 180 Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street landsite boundary line 15. PROJECTING WINDOW OR CANTILEVER INCORPORATED INTO THE MAIN BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into a setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 16. CHIMNEY OR FIREPLACE, EITHER PROJECTING OR NOT INCORPORATED INTO THE BUILDING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) maximum encroachment into a 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m setback b) Other standards applicable The chimney or fireplace may not be wider than 2.5 m. 17. ACCESSORY BUILDING OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED IN LINES No No No Yes Yes 18, 19AND 31 a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line m 1 m b) Other standards applicable See Article WINTER SHELTER OR WINTER TUNNEL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Other standards applicable See Chapter PERGOLA, SUMMERHOUSE, KIOSK OR GAZEBO No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street m - 2 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m c) Maximum height m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m d) Other standards applicable See Article SWIMMING POOL OR SPA AND ACCESSORIES No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a street line m - 5 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary other than a - 2 m 2 m 1.5 m 1.5 m street line c) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum diameter m 0.65 m 0.65 m 0.65 m b) Other standards applicable See Article DISH ANTENNA NOT ATTACHED TO THE MAIN BUILDING No No No Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

197 181 Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street a) Maximum diameter m 2.5 m b) Maximum height, measured from grade level at the base m 5 m c) Minimum distance from a street line m d) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line other m 2 m than a street line e) Other standards applicable See Article ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA No Yes No Yes Yes a) Maximum height, measured from grade level at the base - 25 m 25 m 25 m 25 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article GARBAGE STORAGE OR RECYCLING STORAGE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line b) Other standards applicable See Article GAS, WATER OR ELECTRICITY METER, MAST OR ENTRY CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL POWER a) Other standards applicable - 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m No Yes Yes Yes Yes A distribution network for public utility services must be placed under ground. 26. GAS OR LIQUID FUEL CANISTER OR TANK No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 6 m 6 m 6 m 6 m c) Other standards applicable See Article SILO AND TANK FOR SOLID OR LIQUID PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THAT LISTED ON LINE 26 No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback - 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m b) Other standards applicable See Article FUEL PUMP USED FOR FUELING No Yes No Yes Yes A VEHICLE ASSOCIATED WITH THE COMMUNITY ESTABLISHMENT a) Maximum encroachment into a m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

198 182 Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street setback adjacent to a street b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m - 2 m 2 m c) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON THE GROUND SUCH AS A HEAT PUMP (EXCEPT FOR A SWIMMING POOL HEAT PUMP) OR COMPRESSOR No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m b) Minimum distance between the equipment and the main - 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m building c) Other standards applicable See Article MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON A BUILDING SUCH AS A HEAT No Yes Yes Yes Yes PUMP (EXCEPT FOR A SWIMMING POOL HEAT PUMP) OR COMPRESSOR a) Other standards applicable See Article GATEHOUSE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum height b) Other standards applicable 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m 4.5 m See Article RECREATIONAL OR SPORTS EQUIPMENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Maximum encroachment into a setback adjacent to a street 0 m - 0 m - 0 m 33. OUTDOOR FIREPLACE No Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from the main building - 4 m 4 m 4 m 4 m 34. OUTDOOR STORAGE See Article UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION THAT IS NOT APPARENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 172. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE BUILDING OR TO A ZERO SIDE SETBACK Notwithstanding Article 0, in the case of a semi-detached or rowhouse building or one with a zero side setback, a projection that is incorporated into a building, such as a porch, balcony, Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

199 183 veranda, terrace, exterior staircase, open exterior access ramp or exterior elevator for a disabled person, may be located less than 1 m from the side boundary line when it is in the rear yard. In such a case, an opaque screen at least 1.5 m high and no more than 2 m high, measured from the level of the floor of the projection, must be installed for the entire width of the projection, from the edge of a party wall or wall of a building constructed with a zero side setback ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A FOOD SERVICE TERRACE In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, the following provisions apply to a food service terrace: 1 A food service terrace is only permitted as an accessory structure or use for a main use that includes Retail sale of dairy products or Restaurant as an additional use that includes Establishment serving beverages and offering diverse activities as a dependent use. 2 The terrace must be contiguous with the premises occupied by the establishment that it serves. 3 The terrace must not occupy a yard contiguous with a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Housing (h) group. This provision does not apply if the use in the Housing (h) group of uses is non-conforming in a zone in which the main land use occupation is not Housing (h). 4 A terrace must be separated from a public thoroughfare by a screen, fence, planting box or otherwise, with a maximum height of 1.5 m. 5 The terrace can only be used for the consumption and service of food and drinks. 6 The presentation of a show, dancing or similar event is not authorized on the terrace. In addition, loud speakers or any other sound amplification device may not be installed on the terrace outside the main building. 7 The terrace must not occupy a circulation aisle or an off-street parking area required in virtue of the provisions in the present by-law. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

200 184 8 The places available on the food service terrace must not be taken into consideration when calculating the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for the main use. 9 An access between the building and the terrace is obligatory, and this access must be free of obstacles. 10 A removable fabric awning, banner or canopy to protect the terrace is authorized on the following conditions: a) It may be installed only during the period from March 31 to November 30 of the same year; b) It must be made of incombustible, flame-retardant materials; c) Run-off from the roof must fall at least 0.5 m from any landsite boundary line ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AN ACCESSORY BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, the following provisions apply to an accessory building: 1 The height of the accessory building may not exceed the height prescribed for the main building in the specifications chart. 2 Notwithstanding paragraph 1, the height and the number are not limited for an accessory building that serves a main use in the Services (p3) category is unlimited ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SWIMMING POOL OR SPA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, the following provisions apply to a swimming pool or spa: 1 The area of a swimming pool must not exceed one third of the area of the landsite on which it is installed. In addition, if it is located in a rear yard, it may not exceed 50% of the area of this yard. 2 A swimming pool or spa must be located at least 2.4 m from the main building and more than 1 m from an accessory building. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

201 185 3 All the directives relative to the installation of a swimming pool also apply to the installation of a terrace or patio not attached to the main building and providing access to the swimming pool, to the installation of the equipment required for the operation of the pool, such as the filtration system, water heater, heat pump or gas canister, as well as to the installation of utility items such as a slide, springboard, steps or ladders. A patio or a terrace attached to the main building and providing direct access to the pool may be installed at a distance of 2 m from a rear boundary line. 4 A swimming pool or a spa must be surrounded by a fence with a minimum height of 1.5 m, placed at a minimum distance of 1 m from the edge of the pool or spa. The open space between the finished grade level and the underside of the fence must not exceed 5 cm. Except in the case of a chain link fence, the fence must be composed of vertical elements, and the maximum permitted distance between these elements is 10 cm. Any passage through the fence must be closed by a door fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device. 5 Paragraph 4 does not apply to an above-ground pool surrounded by an integrated fence if the height above grade of the pool wall or the integrated fence is at least 1.5 m. However, the following conditions apply: a) Any steps or ladders providing access to the pool must be surrounded by a fence and by a gate at least 1.5 m high, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; the provisions in Paragraph 4 apply to this fence. b) Should the above-ground pool be accessible by a terrace or a patio connected to the ground by steps or stairs, access to the pool must be prevented by one of the following methods: the top of the stairs or steps must be closed by a gate with a minimum height of 1.5 m, fitted with an automatic closer and an automatic locking device; a fence must be placed across the terrace, patio or platform so as to block access to the pool; the provisions in paragraph 4 apply to this fence. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

202 186 6 Paragraph 4 does not apply to a spa fitted with a lockable cover. When not in use, the spa must be covered and locked ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DISH ANTENNA OR AN ANTENNA OTHER THAN A DISH ANTENNA In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, the following provisions apply to a dish antenna or an antenna other than a dish antenna: 1 Only one antenna may be installed per main building. 2 A dish antenna attached to a building must not obstruct an opening or be installed in front of an opening to the building. 3 A dish antenna, not attached to the main building, located in a yard adjacent to a street must be hidden from the street by an opaque fence or a wall not less than 1.5 m and not more than 2.5 m high or by a dense evergreen hedge ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO STORAGE FOR GARBAGE OR MATERIALS FOR RECYCLING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, the following provisions apply to an area for the storage of garbage and materials for recycling: 1 A space must be reserved inside or outside a building for the storage of garbage and materials for recycling. The following are the types of garbage storage authorized: a) An outdoor enclosure for containers or bins; b) Storage area inside the main building. 2 When a storage area for garbage is required or installed inside a building, this area must be used for storing garbage. 3 Storage of garbage must not obstruct any emergency exit. 4 When several establishments occupy a building with 2 storeys or more, the garbage storage area may be shared, on condition that the minimum volume required for each of the uses is in conformity with the provisions in the present by-law. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

203 187 5 The area for garbage storage must have a volume of 0.9 m 3 per 100 m² of floor area of the use it serves, with the minimum volume being 2.4 m 3. 6 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be accessible by a circulation aisle with a street entrance. There must be an open space with a minimum length of 12 m in front of the door to the enclosure to allow the truck to park during the collection of garbage or materials for recycling. 7 An outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be installed on a concrete or asphalt surface and it must have a door that closes automatically. In addition, it must be surrounded on three sides by a minimum 1 m wide green strip planted with grass and shrubs. 8 The walls of the outdoor enclosure for garbage containers or bins must be at least as high as the garbage containers or bins so that they are not visible from the street or from a contiguous landsite located on the same street, but must not exceed 3 m or be less than 2 m in height. 9 The exterior cladding material on the outdoor enclosure must be an authorized material for a main building by the regulations SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A CANISTER OR TANK FOR GAS OR LIQUID FUEL In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 171, a gas canister or tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg or a liquid gas tank that is not located in a rear yard not adjacent to a street must be hidden by an opaque screen or a wall at least 1.5 m up to maximum 2.5 m high or by a dense, evergreen hedge. This provision does not apply to a main use in the Services (p3) use category. Notwithstanding Article 0, the following provisions apply to a gas canister or a liquid fuel tank: 1 The number of gas or liquid fuel canisters or tanks on a landsite is unlimited for a main use in the Services (p3) use category. 2 A liquid fuel tank used to provide fuel to a vehicle or a fleet of vehicles must be underground. 3 A gas canister or liquid fuel tank with a capacity of more than 9.1 kg must be located at a minimum distance of 20 m from the boundary of a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (h). Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

204 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A SILO, A TANK OR A PUMP FOR LIQUID FUEL Notwithstanding Article 0, the following provisions apply to a silo or tank: 1 A silo or a tank for solid or liquid products used for the purposes of the main use is only authorized for a main use in the Services (p3) use category. 2 A fuel pump used for the purposes of the main use is only authorized for a main use in the Services (p3) use category SPECIFIC AND ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE GROUND OR ON A BUILDING In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of the article 171 and of the first clause of the article, mechanical equipment installed on the ground or on a building, such as a heat pump (except a swimming pool heat pump), an air conditioner or a compressor, must be entirely surrounded by an acoustic, opaque screen with exterior cladding composed of a material authorized in virtue of Chapter 14. The mechanical equipment must be maintained and kept in a good state of repair at all times. SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 181. GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP The following table identifies and governs the accessory uses, accessory buildings, accessory structures, accessory equipment and the projections of the main building that are authorized in a yard for a main use in the Agricultural group. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

205 189 Accessory use, building, structure or equipment and projection for the main building Front Yard Side Yard not adjacent to a street Side Yard adjacent to a street Rear Yard not adjacent to a street Rear Yard adjacent to a street 1. ANY ACCESSORY USE, BUILDING, STRUCTURE OR EQUIPMENT FOR THE MAIN BUILDING OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED ON LINES 2 AND 3 a) Maximum encroachment into a setback 2. PROJECTION OF THE MAIN BUILDING a) Maximum encroachment into a setback b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line 3. STAND FOR THE SALE OF AGRICULTURAL PRODUCTS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Minimum distance from a street line 10 m - 10 m - 10 m b) Minimum distance from a landsite boundary line, other than a street line 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m c) Other standards applicable Article UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE THAT IS NOT APPARENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

206 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM Notwithstanding Article 181, the provisions in Section 2 of the present chapter apply on the portion of the landsite or to the building, as the case may be, occupied by an additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A STAND FOR THE SALE OF FARM PRODUCTS In addition to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 181, the following provisions apply to a stand for the sale of farm products: 1 The additional use sale of farm products may be carried out on the landsite on which the stand is installed. 2 The footprint of the stand must not exceed 55 m² per landsite. 3 A kiosk associated with the stand may be installed during the following periods only: a) From November 15 to December 30 inclusively in the same year, for the sale of Christmas trees; b) From March 1 to April 15 inclusively in the same year, for the sale of maple syrup and derivative products; c) From June 1 to October 31 inclusively in the same year, for the sale of other farm products. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

207 189 CHAPTER 9 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO LANDSITE ENTRANCES AND ACCESS AISLES TO PARKING AREAS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 184. SITING OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE A landsite entrance (also known as a curb cut) or an access aisle must be located more than 1 m from a side landsite boundary line. This 1 m wide strip must be covered in grass or otherwise landscaped. This provision does not apply to the party boundary to a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category constructed as a semi-detached or rowhouse dwelling, if the landsite entrance or access aisle is located in the front yard and if the private garages integrated into the dwelling are contiguous. An access aisle must be located at least 1.2 m from a building occupied by a main use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3), Collective housing (h4), Commercial (c), Industrial (i) or Community (p) use category. There must be a minimum distance of 7.5 m between two entrances located on the same landsite, and between an entrance and a street intersection. The distance must be measured on the street line, from the edge of the travel portion of the entrance to the landsite. An access aisle must be located on the same landsite as the off-street parking area it serves LAYOUT OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR ACCESS AISLE An access aisle must be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the following provisions: 1 An access aisle leading to an off-street parking area must be covered in asphalt, concrete, concrete pavers or stone pavers. 2 Notwithstanding Paragraph 1, an access aisle leading to an off-street parking area may be covered in gravel, crushed stone or another hard surface of aggregate material when the access aisle is on a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Agricultural (a) group. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

208 190 3 An access aisle leading to an off-street parking area that has more than 5 parking spaces must be bordered by a concrete curb poured in situ and at least 0.15 m high. The installation work for the landsite entrance and the access aisle must be completed before the validity periods for the building permit and the certificate of authorization expire USE OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE A landsite entrance or an access aisle may not be used for parking or storing a vehicle or a trailer. An access aisle serving a use in the Housing (h) group may however be used for parking a vehicle SHARED LANDSITE ENTRANCE AND ACCESS AISLE The use of a landsite entrance or an access aisle may be shared to serve off-street parking spaces or loading and unloading areas and berths located on adjacent landsites. A real servitude published in the land register must guarantee the shared use of the landsite entrance and the access aisle RULE FOR CALCULATING THE WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE The width of a landsite entrance is measured from the street line. SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 189. SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR THE SITING OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE In the case of a use in the Multi-family (h3) or Collective housing (h4) category, a landsite entrance or an access aisle may not encroach onto the width of the main façade of a building SPECIFIC PROVISIONS THE SITING OF A SEMI-CIRCULAR ACCESS AISLE Notwithstanding Article 189, a semi-circular access aisle is authorized in the front yard under the following conditions: Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

209 191 1 The width of the landsite in which this access aisle is located is at least 20 m. 2 The width of this access aisle is no more than 4 m. 3 The portion of this access aisle that is parallel to the street must be located at least 3 m from the line of the street. 4 This access aisle must be bordered, on the side next to the road, by a minimum 3 m wide strip covered with grass or otherwise landscaped MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LANDSITE ENTRANCES The maximum number of landsite entrances is fixed as follows: 1 2 landsite entrances per main building in the case of a building occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) or Two-family or three-family dwelling (h2) category. 2 3 landsite entrances per main building in the case of a building occupied by a use in the Multi-family (h3) or Collective housing (h4) category WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE M The width of a landsite entrance or an access aisle is set as follows: Type of Dwelling Minimum Width Maximum Width Single-family dwelling (h1) constructed as a semi-detached or rowhouse dwelling, and Two-family or three-family dwelling (h2) Single-family dwelling (h1) constructed as a rowhouse dwelling Multi-family (h3) or Collective housing (h4) (CA ; ) 3 m 6.5 m 3 m 5.5 m 4.5 m 7.5m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

210 192 SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P), RECREATIONAL (R) AND AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUPS 193. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LANDSITE ENTRANCES For a use in the Commercial (c) and Recreational (r) groups, the maximum number of landsite entrances is set at 2 entrances on each street with which the landsite is contiguous. For a use in the Industrial (i) group, the number of landsite entrances is set at 1 entrance on each street with which the landsite is contiguous for the first 30 m stretch of street line, plus 1 entrance for each additional 30 m stretch of street line after the first 30 m. For all other use groups, the number of landsite entrances is set at 2 entrances on each street with which the landsite is contiguous for the first 60 m stretch of street line, plus 1 entrance for each additional 60 m stretch of street line after the first 60 m WIDTH OF A LANDSITE ENTRANCE OR AN ACCESS AISLE The width of a landsite entrance or an access aisle is set as follows: Type of Use Minimum Width Maximum Width All use groups except the uses in the Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) and Services for motorized vehicles, except heavy vehicles, or for recreational vehicles (c3b) categories. Uses in the following use categories: Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) ; Services for motorized vehicles, except heavy vehicles, or for recreational vehicles (c3b). 4 m 12 m 7.5 m 12 m Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

211 SPECIFIC PROVISION FOR THE ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM The provisions in the present chapter apply for a landsite entrance or an access aisle serving an additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group. Chapter 8 : Provisions relative to uses, buildings, structures, equipment and projections into yards

212 194 CHAPTER 10 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO OFF-STREET PARKING SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 196. NECCESSITY FOR AND MAINTENANCE OF A PARKING AREA Any main use must be served by an off-street parking area. The off-street parking area that serves a main use must have the minimum number of parking spaces required by the present by-law. These parking spaces must be maintained for as long as the main use is being carried out. In the case of an off-street parking area in which the number of parking spaces is not in conformity with the minimum requirements in the by-law, including the absence of off-street parking, but which is protected by acquired rights: 1 The area occupied by an existing main use served by this parking area may be enlarged, as long as the capacity of the off-street parking area is increased to the minimum number of spaces required by the enlargement. 2 Changing a use served by this parking area is not permitted, unless the new use requires a minimum number of off-street parking spaces equal to or less than that required for the existing use, or if it is possible to make the off-street parking area conform to the minimum applicable requirements for all the uses served USE OF A PARKING AREA A circulation aisle may not be used for parking or storing a vehicle or a trailer RULES FOR CALCULATING THE NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES The following rules apply for calculating the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required in the by-law: Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

213 195 1 When the calculation for the minimum number of off-street parking spaces results in a fraction that is more than one half, this result is rounded up to the next number. 2 When the building is occupied by several uses, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required corresponds to the sum of the spaces required by each of the uses served exception made of a building located in a zone of which the main designation is Industrial, in such a case, a ratio in conformity with Article 215 is required for all the uses of the building. M (CA ; ) 3 When the calculation of the number of off-street parking spaces is based on an area, this area is the gross floor area occupied by the use served. 4 When a requirement is based on the number of seats, and when there are existing or proposed benches instead of individual seats, each 50 cm length of bench is considered equivalent to one seat DIMENSIONS OF PARKING SPACES AND OF CIRCULATION AISLES The minimum and maximum dimensions of an off-street parking space, except for a designated space for the disabled, are set as follows: 1 Minimum and maximum width: 2.5 m min / 3 m max. 2 Minimum and maximum length: a) 5m min. / 5.5m max. if the space is at an angle of 90 degrees; b) 5.5 m min. / 6 m max. if the space is at an angle of 30, 45 or 60 degrees; c) 7 m min. / 7.5 m max. if the space is at an angle of 0. The width of an off-street parking space must always be measured perpendicular to the side lines, real or imaginary, that delineate the parking space. The minimum width for a circulation aisle and the minimum width for a row of parking spaces to which the aisle gives access must be in conformity with the provisions in the following tables: Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

214 196 1 Circulation aisle and row of parking spaces installed outdoors for a use in the Housing (h) group: Angle authorized for the space in relation to the traffic direction Minimum width of an outdoor circulation aisle Minimum depth of an outdoor row of parking spaces 0 3 m 2.5 m m 4.6 m 45 4 m 5.5 m m 5.8 m m 5.5 m 2 Circulation aisle and row of parking spaces installed outdoors for all other use groups: Angle authorized for the space in relation to the traffic direction Minimum width of an outdoor circulation aisle Minimum depth of an outdoor row of parking spaces m 2.5 m m 4.6 m m 5.5 m 60 6 m 5.8 m m 5.5 m 3 Circulation aisle and row of parking spaces installed indoors for all use groups: Angle authorized for the space in relation to the traffic direction Minimum width of an indoor circulation aisle Minimum depth of an indoor row of parking spaces 0 3 m 2.5 m m 4.6 m 45 4 m 5.5 m 60 5 m 5.8 m 90 5 m 5.5 m Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

215 DESIGNATED PARKING SPACES FOR THE DISABLED In addition to the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required in terms of the use, an off-street parking area must include a certain number of parking spaces adapted and reserved for the disabled under the meaning of the Act to secure disabled persons in the exercise of their rights with a view to achieving social, school and workplace integration (R.S.Q, c. E-20.1). The number of off-street parking spaces designated for the disabled must be calculated by taking into account the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required by the present by-law for the use served. The number of designated spaces for the disabled is set as follows: Number of off-street parking spaces required Minimum number of designated spaces for the disabled 25 spaces or less 1 space 26 to 50 spaces 2 spaces 51 to 75 spaces 3 spaces 76 to 175 spaces 4 spaces 176 to 299 spaces 5 spaces 300 to 399 spaces 6 spaces 400 to 499 spaces 7 spaces 500 or more spaces 8 spaces A designated parking space for the disabled must be identified by a panel recognized in the Highway Safety Code (R.S.Q., c. C-24.2) and in the Regulation respecting road signs (R.Q., c. C-24, r.28). The panel must be fixed to the top of a post installed at the front corner of every designated parking space for the handicapped. When a space is less than 1 m from the wall of a building, the panel may be fixed to this wall. In all cases, the top of the panel must be at a height of between 2 m and 3m. A designated parking space for the disabled must be located as close as possible to a main entrance of the building that presents no obstacles. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

216 198 A designated parking space for the disabled must have a minimum width of 2.5 m, a minimum length of 5 m, or 5.5m if there is no curb, and be bordered, along its entire length on the driver s side, by a side aisle with a minimum width of 1.5 m. The surface of this side aisle must be entirely hatched so as to prohibit parking within it. The side aisle may be shared by two adjacent spaces if the angle of the space is at 90 to the circulation aisle. The present article does not apply to an off-street parking area serving a main use in the Housing (h) group that has less than 10 dwelling units or less than 10 rooms LAYOUT OF A PARKING AREA An off-street parking area must be laid out and maintained in accordance with the following provisions: 1 Off-street parking area with 5 or less parking spaces: Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

217 199 a) Except for an off-street parking area serving a Single-family dwelling (h1) or Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) use, the off-street parking area must be laid out to allow a vehicle to access each parking space without the need to move another vehicle. b) The entire surface of an off-street parking area must be covered in asphalt, concrete, concrete pavers or stone pavers. c) Notwithstanding sub-paragraph a), an off-street parking area may be covered in gravel, crushed stone or another hard surface of aggregate material in the following cases: When the off-street parking area is on a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Agricultural (a) group; For the first year in which the street on which the landsite is located is paved or the start of construction of the main building, as the case may be. d) An off-street parking area must be at least 1 m from any landsite boundary line, unless it is inside a building. 2 In addition to the provisions in Paragraph, the following provisions apply to an off-street parking area with more than 5 parking spaces: a) The off-street parking area must be laid out so as to allow a vehicle to enter and exit the area by moving in a forward direction, with all manœuvers being carried out within the off-street parking area itself. b) The off-street parking area must include as many circulation aisles as required in order to allow access to each parking space without the need to move another vehicle. c) Except for a shared off-street parking area, an outdoor off-street parking area must be bordered, along the landsite boundary line other than a street line, by a strip at least 1 m wide, covered in grass or otherwise landscaped. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

218 200 d) An outdoor off-street parking area located in a front yard, a side yard adjacent to a street or a rear yard adjacent to a street must be bordered along the street, except for landsite entrances and access aisles, by a strip at least 2 m wide, landscaped in conformity with Paragraph e) below. The width of the landscaped strip must be increased to obtain an area equal to that obtained by multiplying, by 2 m, the width of a landsite entrance installed in one or other of these yards, or the sum of the widths of the landsite entrances if there is more than one. e) An embankment with a minimum height of 0.6 m in relation to the level of the parking area and with a slope of less than 30% must be installed along the side with the street when the off-street parking area is located in a yard adjacent to a street. At least 50% of the area of this embankment must be planted with trees and shrubs, with more than 50% of these trees being coniferous. The trees must be spaced no more than 7 m apart. This embankment may be installed within the street easement belonging to the municipality. However, no trees or shrubs may be planted in this easement unless an agreement has been reached between the competent authority and the owner. f) Notwithstanding sub-paragraph e), the embankment to be installed with a height of at least 0.6 m may be replaced by a low wall of equivalent height. At least 50% of the façade of the wall facing the street must be landscaped with planting. However, no planting or wall is permitted unless an agreement has been reached between the competent authority and the owner. g) A off-street parking area, as well as a landsite entrance must be bordered by a concrete curb poured in situ, with a height of at least 0.15 m. h) The delineation of all parking spaces must be identified by markings on the surface of an off-street parking area. i) An outdoor circulation aisle may not be installed within 1 m of the wall of a building, except for the placement of and approach to a drive-through. 3 In addition to the provisions in paragraphs 1 and 2, the following provisions apply to an outdoor off-street parking area with more than 12 parking spaces : a) The off-street parking area must be equipped with a lighting system. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

219 201 b) The surface must be adequately drained to avoid any accumulation of water in the off-street parking area. To this end, every 2,000 m² of an off-street parking area must be equipped with a sump, 60 cm x 60 cm or 75 cm in diameter. Each sump must be connected using a Class 3 reinforced concrete pipe or a SDR35 cm PVC pipe with a minimum diameter of 200 mm. c) When an off-street parking area requires the installation of more than 2 catchment basins, an engineer who is a member of the Ordre des ingénieurs du Québec must approve the system. d) An off-street parking area serving a use in the Commercial (c), Industrial (i) and Community (p) groups must include pockets of landscaping, installed at the ends of each row containing at least 15 parking spaces. A landscaped pocket must have a minimum area of 30 m² and be composed of grass, shrubs and trees, with at least 30% of the pocket filled with shrubs and trees. 4 In addition to the provisions in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, the following provisions apply to an outdoor off-street parking area with more than 100 parking spaces: a) The off-street parking area must include access aisles to channel traffic towards the landsite entrances. b) In the grassed or otherwise landscaped strip bordering any entrance aisle mentioned in sub-paragraph a), a deciduous with a D.B.H. of at least 5 cm or a conifer with a height of at least 2 m, at the time of their planting, it is planted at 24 m linear intervals. At least 60% of these trees must be coniferous. The landscaping work for the off-street parking area must be completed before the validity periods for the building permit and the certificate of authorization expire. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

220 SHARED PARKING AREA An off-street parking area may be shared to serve several uses located on the same landsite or on different s. The off-street parking area may straddle a landsite boundary line as long as the two landsites are located in the same zone or in different zones that have the same main land use occupation. Off-street parking areas located on different landsites but landscaped in continuity must be considered as a single parking area for the application of the provisions in the present chapter. Off-street parking areas located on different landsites and not landscaped in continuity may be joined by an access aisle. However, each off-street parking area must have another access aisle to allow direct access to and from the street PARKING SPACES LOCATED ON A DIFFERENT LANDSITE THAN THE USE THEY SERVE In a case where the provisions in the present chapter allow the required off-street parking spaces to be located on a landsite other than that on which the use they serve is located, and where the landsites belong to different owners, the maintenance and the right to the use of these parking spaces must be guaranteed by a real servitude published in the land register INSTALLATION OF BICYCLE PARKING When a main building is constructed or enlarged, parking units for bicycles must be installed. In the case of an enlargement, only the enlargement is considered for establishing the requirements. All off-street parking units for bicycles must be installed and maintained as follows: 1 The units must be within 50 m of the main entrance to the building served or be inside the building; 2 Each unit must be at least 1.80 m in length; 3 The units may be inside or outside a building; 4 Units must be freely accessible by visitors; Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

221 203 5 Each unit must be fixed to the ground or to the wall of a building and be designed so as to make it possible to keep the bicycle in a normal position on two wheels or to suspend it; 6 It must be possible to lock the bike into its parking unit. SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 205. SITING OF PARKING SPACES M All off-street parking spaces required by the by-law must be located on the same landsite as the use they serve. For the Multi-family (h3) and Collective housing (h4), an off-street parking area may not encroach onto the minimum front setback. However, up to 10% of the number of spaces required for a use in the Multi-family (h3) category may encroach onto the minimum front setback, on condition that these spaces are reserved for the exclusive use of visitors. (CA ; ) Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

222 MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES Subject to Article 198, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for a use in the Housing (h) group or for an additional use to a main use in this group is determined as follows: Main Type of Use Single-family dwelling (h1) Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) Multi-family dwelling (h3) Collective housing (h4) Type of Additional Use Boarding rooms, foster family, foster home and intermediary resources Additional use authorized for a building with more than 60 dwelling units or more than 120 rooms Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per dwelling unit 1 space per dwelling unit plus 1 space 1.25 spaces per dwelling unit plus 0.20 space per dwelling unit, for visitors 0.3 space per bed or space per dwelling unit, reserved for employees and identified as such plus; space per bed or per dwelling unit. Of this number, 15% of the spaces, with a minimum of 3 spaces, must be located close to the main entrance to the building and identified as short-stay spaces (max. 15 mins.) plus, as needed; 0.45 space per dwelling unit, of which at least 50% must be located inside the building. Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per 4 rooms In accordance with the provisions in articles 0 and 0 that follow by incorporating the additional use into a main use 207. MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A BUILDING IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION Notwithstanding Article 206, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building with one or several uses in the Housing (h), located within 500 m of a station, group may be reduced by 25%. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

223 205 In addition, a use listed in the preceding paragraph may not be served by a number of parking spaces that exceeds 25% of the minimum number required by the present by-law, except in the case of parking intended for public transit users MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS The minimum number of bicycle parking units required for a use in the Housing (h) group that has more than 6 dwelling units is set at 5% of the minimum number of parking spaces required, up to a total of 10 units. SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP 209. SITING OF PARKING SPACES The off-street parking area that serves a use in the Commercial (c) group may be located on the same landsite as the use served, or on a different landsite. This latter landsite must be located in whole or in part within a radius of 100 m or less from the landsite on which the use served is located, and must be in the same zone or in a zone in which the main land occupation use is Commercial (C), Community (P) or Recreational (R). When the off-street parking area is located on a different landsite, a pedestrian path at least 6 m in width must connect this parking area to the use served MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES Subject to articles 211 and 212, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for a use in the Commercial (c) group is established in the table below. When a use is not listed in this table, the minimum number of spaces required must be established on the basis of the requirements of the present article for a comparable use. Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Minimum Number of Spaces Retail sale of food products and dry consumer goods (c1a) 1 space per 25 m² (Only 50% of the basement floor area must be taken into account) Professional, business (including associations), financial and communication services, and services for the maintenance, repair or rental of various products (c1b) 1 space per 25 m² Childcare services (6541) 1 space per 25 m² Intensive commercial entertainment (c2a): Miniature golf (indoor or outdoor) (7392) 1 space per hole Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

224 206 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Other places of amusement (indoor premises) (7399) Poolroom (7396) Bowling alley (7417) Indoor swimming pool and related activities (7432) Curling rink (7452) Squash, racquetball tennis courts (7413) Intensive commercial entertainment (c2a) not listed elsewhere Commercial entertainment with gathering space (c2b), except a drive-in cinema (7213) Accommodation and conference services (c2c): Hotel (5831), motel (5832), inn or B&B (5833) with no more than 9 lodging units Accommodation and conference services (c2c): Hotel (5831), motel (5832) or inn with more than 9 lodging units Accommodation and conference services (c2c): Tourist home (5834) Additional use or dependent use for accommodation and conference services (c2c), excluding meeting rooms, conference and convention centre (7233) Meeting rooms, conference and convention centre (7233), whether for a main use, an additional use or a dependent use for a main use listed under code 583 Lodging establishment Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per play area 1 space per pool table or 1 space per 13 m², with the most demanding provision taking precedence 2 spaces per lane 1 space per 4 swimmers, depending on the capacity of the facility 2 spaces per sheet 1 space per court 1 space per 4 seats for a facility with fixed seats and 1 space per 10 m² for an area accessible to the public with no fixed seats 1 space per 6 seats up to 800 and 1 space per 10 seats after the first 800 seats 2 basic spaces plus 1.5 space per lodging unit 13 basic spaces plus 1 space per 2 lodging units after the first 9 lodging units, and 10 spaces for every other complete or partial block of 40 lodging units 1 space per lodging unit 50% of the number of spaces that would be required if the use were a main use 1 space per 13m² Food service (c2d) in a building occupied by at least 4 commercial establishments 1 space per 25 m² Food service (c2d) in a building occupied by less than 4 commercial establishments 1 space per 13 m² Services for motorized vehicles, except heavy vehicles, or for recreational vehicles (c3b), except for the use Service station with car repairs (5531) 1 space per 25 m² Retail distribution centres for petroleum and fuel products (c3a) and the use Service station with car repairs (5531) 3 spaces Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

225 207 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Minimum Number of Spaces Rental services and retail sale of motorized vehicles, except heavy vehicles, or of recreational vehicles (c3c) 1 space per 25 m² Credit for warranty service 1 space per 25 m² Licensed establishments and dance halls (c4b) 1 space per 13 m² Business or service of a sexual nature (c4c) 1 space per 25 m² Daytime or night-time dance hall (c4d) 1 space per 25 m² Retail sales establishment for used merchandise or a public market (c4e) 1 space per 25 m² The use Retail sale of gardening articles and accessories (536) that has a greenhouse of at least 50 m² and in the Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale businesses and para-industrial services (c5) use category Use in the Heavy arterial commercial activities and para-industrial services (c5) use category 1 space per 25 m² (Excluding the area of the greenhouse) 1 space per 35 m² 211. MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR AN COMMERCIAL (C) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION Notwithstanding articles 210 and 212, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building with one or several uses in the Commercial (c) group may be reduced by 25%. In addition, a use listed in the preceding paragraph may not be served by a number of parking spaces that exceeds 25% of the minimum number required by the present by-law, except in the case of parking intended for public transit users MINIMUM NUMBER OF SCPACES FOR A LARGE COMMERCIAL BUILDING Notwithstanding article 210, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building composed of one or more uses in the Commercial (c) group and in which a floor area is at least 2,300 m 2, is set at 1 space per 25 m 2 of leasable floor area. Notwithstanding the first paragraph, a use within the category Intensive commercial entertainment (c2a), Commercial entertainment with gathering place (c2b), Food services (c2d) or licensed establishments and dance halls (c4b) may rely on the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required in the first paragraph only if the floor area occupied by these uses is less than 25% of that of the commercial building. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

226 MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS The minimum number of bicycle parking units required for a use in the Commercial (c) group is set at 5% of the minimum number of parking spaces required, up to a total of 30 spaces. SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP 214. SITING OF PARKING SPACES The off-street parking area that serves a use in the Industrial (i) group may be located on the same landsite as the use served or on a different landsite. This latter landsite must be in whole or in part located within a radius of 150 m or less from the landsite on which the use served is located, and must be in the same zone or in a zone in which the main land occupation use is Industrial (i). When the off-street parking area is located on a different landsite, a pedestrian path at least 6 m in width must connect this parking area to the use served MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES The minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for a use in the Industrial (i) group is 1 space per 56 m² and the surface area of the parking area must be equal to at least 75% of the gross floor area of the industrial premises MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR AN INDUSTRIAL (I) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION Notwithstanding Article 215, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building with one or several uses in the Industrial (I) group may be reduced by 25%. In addition, a use listed in the preceding paragraph may not be served by a number of parking spaces that exceeds 25% of the minimum number required by the present by-law, except in the case of parking intended for public transit users MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS The minimum number of bicycle parking units required for a use in the Industrial (i) group is set at 5% of the minimum number of parking spaces required, up to a total of 30 spaces. SECTION 5: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMUNITY (P) GROUP Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

227 SITING OF PARKING SPACES The off-street parking area that serves a use in the Community (p) group may be located on the same landsite as the use served or on a different landsite. This latter landsite must be in whole or in part located within a radius of 100 m or less from the landsite on which the use served is located, and must be in the same zone or in a zone in which the main land occupation use is Commercial (c), Community (p) or Recreational (r). When the off-street parking area is located on a different landsite, a pedestrian path at least 6 m in width must connect this parking area to the use served MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES The minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for a use in the Community (p) group is established in the table below. When a use is not listed in this table, the minimum number of spaces required must be established on the basis of the requirements of the present article for a comparable use. Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Minimum Number of Spaces Uses in the Recreation (p1) use category Outdoor pool and related activities (7432) 2 spaces per playground, amusement area or sports field 1 space per 4 swimmers, depending on the capacity of the facility Additional use or a dependent use for a use in the Recreation (p1) use category 50% of the number of spaces that would be required if it were a main use Institutions (p2): 691 Religious activity Community or neighbourhood centre (including a diocesan centre) (6997) Stadium (7221) Multi-use sports centre (covered) (7222) Other sports facilities (7229) General recreation centre (7424) Arena and related activities (ice skating) (7451) Institutions (p2): 153 Residence and student housing 155 Residence for a religious institution 681 Pre-school, primary and secondary schools 1 space per 5 seats up to 800 seats and 1 space per 10 seats after the first 800 seats for a facility with fixed seats or 1 space per 5 people, depending on the capacity of the facility, for an area without fixed seats 1 space per 2 rooms 1 space per 4 rooms 1 space per 2 employees plus 1.5 spaces per classroom Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

228 210 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Polyvalent school (6822) Orphanage (1542) Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per classroom 1 space per 2 beds Institutions (p2): University (6821) C.E.G.E.P. (6823) 1 space per 20 m² Institutions (p2): Hospital services (including psychiatric hospitals) (6513) Sanatorium, convalescent home and rest home (6516) 1 space per 2 beds or 1 space per 100 m²: whichever is the most demanding Institutions (p2): Local community services centre (C.L.S.C.) (6532) Social services centres (C.S.S. and C.R.S.S.S.) (6533) Other social services centres or offices of social services practitioners (6539) Self-help and community resources centre (6534). Municipal and regional public administration (6713) Welfare and charity services Tourist information office (6996) 1 space per 37 m² Institutions (p2): Assisted living retirement home (1541) Other retirement homes (1549) Reception centre or curative facility (6531) Transition house (people stay in these facilities for a limited time) (6542) Institutions (p2): Library (7111) Museum (7112) 0.3 space per bed or space per dwelling unit, reserved for employees and identified as such, plus: space per bed or per dwelling unit. Of this number, 15% of the spaces (minimum 3 spaces) must be located near the main entrance to the building and identified as short-stay parking spaces (max. 15 mins.), plus: 0.45 space per dwelling unit, at least 50% of which must be located inside the building. 1 space per 40 m² Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

229 211 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Minimum Number of Spaces Art gallery (except for a commercial gallery in which art objects are sold, including those under codes (5947) (7113) Exhibition hall (7114) Use in the Institutions (p2) use category not listed 1 space per 37 m² elsewhere Additional use or dependent use for the Institutions 50% of the number of spaces that would (p2) use category be required if it were a main use Use in the Services (p3) use category 1 space per 37 m² Additional use for a use in the Services (p3) use category 50% of the number of spaces that would be required if it were a main use 220. MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A COMMUNITY (P) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION Notwithstanding Article 219, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building with one or several uses in the Housing (h) group within 500 m of a commuter train station may be reduced by 25%. In addition, a use listed in the preceding paragraph may not be served by a number of parking spaces that exceeds 25% of the minimum number required by the present by-law, except in the case of parking intended for public transit users. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

230 MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS The minimum number of bicycle parking units required for a use in the Community (p) group is set at 5% of the minimum number of parking spaces required, up to a total of 30 spaces. However, for a use in the Teaching Establishments (p2b) sub-category, the minimum number of bicycle parking units is set at 1 unit per 10 students. SECTION 6: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE RECREATIONAL (R) GROUP 222. SITING OF PARKING SPACES The off-street parking area that serves a use in the Recreational (r) group may be located on the same landsite as the use served or on a different landsite. This latter landsite must be in whole or in part located within a radius of 150 m or less from the landsite on which the use served is located, and must be in the same zone or in a zone in which the main land occupation use is Commercial (c), Community (p) or Recreational (r). When the off-street parking area is located on a different landsite, a pedestrian path at least 6 m in width must connect this parking area to the use served MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES The minimum number of off-street parking spaces required for a use in the Recreational (r) group is established in the table below. When a use is not listed in the table, the minimum number of spaces required must be established on the basis of the requirements in the present article for a comparable use. Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Activities related to water sports (r1a): Rental services for watercraft (6356) Marina, harbour for pleasure craft and quay for boarding cruise ships (excluding ferries) (7441) Clubs and schools for water sports activities and water safety (including, in particular, sailing, wind surfing, yachting, canoeing, kayaking and water skiing) (7444) Maintenance, repair and winter storage services for watercraft (7445) Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per 75 m² 0.6 space per mooring 1 space per 10 seats or 1 space per 35 m² 1 space per 75 m² Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

231 213 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Boat removal and installation services (hoist, boat lift) (7446) Site for water sports displays (7448) Space-consuming recreational activities (r1b): Golf course (no clubhouse or other sports facilities) (7411) Golf course (clubhouse and other sports facilities) (7412) Luge run, bobsleigh course and ski-jumping facility (7224) Driving range (7393) Horse riding (equestrian centre) (7416) Campground (excluding caravan site) (includes all sites with electricity and water hook-ups and fuel) (7491) Campground and caravan site (includes all sites with electricity and water hook-ups, fuel and tank emptying (septic discharge tanks) (7493) Slide (waterslide) (7418) Minimum Number of Spaces 1 space per 75 m² 1 space per 6 seats, up to 800 seats and 1 space per 10 seats after the first 800 seats for a facility with fixed seats or 1 space per 6 people, depending on the capacity of the facility, for an area without fixed seats 2 spaces per hole 2 spaces per hole plus 1 space per 10 m² 4 spaces per run 1 space per teeing area 1 space per stall 1 space on each campsite or caravan site 1 space on each campsite or caravan site 4 spaces per slide 712 Exhibition of objects or animals 731 Exhibition park and amusement park Use in the Extensive recreation (r1) use category not listed elsewhere Additional use or dependent use for a use in the Extensive recreation (r1) use category Track activities (r2a): Racetrack (includes tracks for one or more types of race (cars, motorcycles, etc.) (7223) Race course (horses) (7225) Go kart track (7394) Firing range (9871) and Archery and cross bow centre (9872) 1 space per 6 seats up to 800 seats and 1 space per 10 seats after the first 800 seats for a facility with fixed seats or 1 space per 6 people, depending on the capacity of the facility, for an area without fixed seats 1 space per 75 m² 50% of the number of spaces that would be required if it were a main use 1 space per 6 seats up to 800 seats and 1 space per 10 seats after the first 800 seats for a facility with fixed seats or 1 space per 6 people, depending on the capacity of the facility, for an area without fixed seats 1 space per firing point Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

232 214 Type of Main, Additional or Dependent Use Use in the use category Extreme and motorized sports (r2) not listed elsewhere Additional use or dependent use for the Extreme and motorized sports (r2) use category Minimum Number of Spaces Number of spaces that can be laid out in an area corresponding to 1.5% of the landsite area 50% of the number of spaces that would be required if it were a main use 224. MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR A RECREATIONAL (R) BUILDING LOCATED LESS THAN 500 METRES FROM A COMMUTER TRAIN STATION Notwithstanding Article 223, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces for a building with one or several uses in the Housing (h) group within 500 m of a station may be reduced by 25%. In addition, a use listed in the preceding paragraph may not be served by a number of parking spaces that exceeds 25% of the minimum number required by the present by-law, except in the case of parking intended for public transit users MINIMUM NUMBER OF BICYCLE PARKING UNITS The minimum number of bicycle parking units required for a use in the Recreational (r) group is set at 5% of the minimum number of parking spaces required, up to a total of 30 spaces. SECTION 7: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 226. SITING OF PARKING SPACES The off-street parking area that serves a use in the Agricultural (a) group must be located on the same landsite as the use it serves MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES There must be at least 2 parking spaces for an additional use of sale of a farm product, and the parking area must have an area equal to at least 300% of the gross floor area of the kiosk associated with the stand. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

233 MINIMUM NUMBER OF SPACES FOR THE ADDITIONAL USE OF DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM The provisions of the present chapter apply for an off-street parking area serving an additional use of dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group. Chapter 10: Provisions relative to off-street parking

234 216 CHAPTER 11 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO LOADING BAYS AND BERTHS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 229. LAYOUT OF A LOADING BAY, DELIVERY AREA, BERTH AND MANŒUVERING AREA A loading bay, delivery area, berth or a manœuvering area must be laid out and maintained in accordance with the following provisions: 1 The surface of a loading bay, delivery area, berth or manœuvering area must be covered in asphalt, concrete, concrete pavers or stone pavers. 2 Notwithstanding Paragraph 1, the surface of a loading bay, delivery area, berth or manœuvering area may be covered in gravel, crushed stone or other hard surface aggregate material in the following cases: a) When the surface of a loading bay, delivery area, berth or manœuvering area is located on a landsite occupied or intended to be occupied by a use in the Agricultural (a) group; b) The first year in which the street on which the landsite is located is paved. 3 A loading bay, delivery area or berth must be served by a manœuvering area, the dimensions of which must be sufficient to allow all manœuvers to be carried out within the boundaries of the landsite on which the use served is located. 4 A loading bay, delivery area or berth must be at least 4 m wide, 10 m long and have a minimum free height of 4.5 m. In addition, the dimensions of a loading bay, delivery area or berth must be sufficient to allow a delivery vehicle to park without encroaching onto property beyond the boundaries of the landsite on which the use served is located, or encroaching onto a yard or a setback in which the installation of a loading bay, delivery area or berth is prohibited. Chapter 11 : Provisions relative to loading bays and berths

235 217 5 A loading bay, delivery area or berth contiguous with a wall of a building facing a street must be hidden by a dense evergreen hedge, an opaque fence or a wall, the cladding materials of which are similar to that of the main building, with a height of between 1.5 m and 2.5 m. This provision takes precedence over any other contrary provision in Chapter A loading bay, delivery area, berth or manœuvering area must be bordered by a concrete curb poured in situ, with a height of at least 0.15 m. 7 Except in the case of a shared manœuvering area, an outdoor manœuvering area must be bordered, on the side nearest a landsite boundary line other than a street line, by a grassed or otherwise landscaped strip at least 1 m wide. 8 A manœuvering area located in a front yard, a side yard adjacent to a street or a rear yard adjacent to a street must be bordered, on the side nearest the street, by a grassed or otherwise landscaped strip at least 3 m wide SHARED MANOEUVERING AREA A manœuvering area may be shared to serve loading bays and delivery areas located on adjacent landsites. A real servitude published in the register must guarantee the shared use of the landsite entrance, the access aisle and the manœuvering area SITING OF A LOADING BAY, DELIVERY AREA, BERTH OR MANŒUVERING AREA Notwithstanding articles 147, 163, 171 and 181, a loading bay, delivery area or berth, or manœuvering area for a loading bay, delivery area or berth may not be located in a yard contiguous with a landsite occupied by or intended to be occupied by a main use in the Housing (h) group. Chapter 11 : Provisions relative to loading bays and berths

236 218 SECTION 2: SPECIFIC PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) OR INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP 232. NUMBER OF LOADING BAYS, DELIVERY AREAS OR BERTHS REQUIRED FOR A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) OR INDUSTRIAL (I) GROUP The number of loading bays, delivery areas or berths required to serve a use in the Commercial (c) or Industrial (i) group is established according to the following provisions: oss Floor Area for the Use in the umber of Loading Bays, Delivery Areas Commercial (c) or Industrial (i) Group or Berths Required ea is between 500 m² and 2,000 m² ea is between 2,001 m² and 5,000 m² ea is between 5,001 m² and 9,000 m² ea is more than 9,001 m² units plus 1 additional unit for every 4,000 m² after the first 9,000 m² Chapter 11 : Provisions relative to loading bays and berths

237 219 CHAPTER 12 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 233. LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS ON A LANDSITE Unless it is to be left in its natural state, any unused or unoccupied area on a landsite, and any area disturbed by construction work must be grassed or otherwise landscaped to cover any bare ground. To this end, artificial turf is not authorized as a ground cover except for a use in the Outdoor installations intended for relaxation, leisure and sports (p1a) and Cultural and sports establishments, or those related to public affairs and community services (p2d) sub-groups or in the Recreation (r) group category. When work has been carried out under a building permit or a certificate of authorization, the landscaping of all unused, unoccupied or disturbed areas must be completed within 12 months of the issuance of the building permit or certificate of authorization. N In all cases, the owner is responsible for the grassing and maintenance of his land up to the street asphalt. (CA ; ) SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 234. LANDSCAPING OF THE FRONT YARD The front yard of a landsite occupied by a use in the Housing (h) group must be grassed or otherwise landscaped with plants and vegetation according to the following proportions: 1 Use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category in which construction is contiguous (row houses): 20% for the centre units and 40% for the end units; 2 Use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category of 5 storeys or more and located on a landsite adjacent to Rivière-des-Prairies: 25%. For corner units of a building with a contiguous structure: 40%; 3 For all other uses in the Housing (h) group: 50%. Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

238 LANDSCAPING REQUIREMENTS FOR A USE IN THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY A strip of land, grassed or otherwise landscaped and at least 1 m wide, must be installed on a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category for detached, semidetached and rowhouse structures. This strip of greenery must be adjacent to the side wall of the building, on the side that is not a party wall. A strip of land, grassed or landscaped and at least 1 m wide, must be installed between a circulation aisle and a parking area and the side property boundary line on a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category for detached, semi-detached and rowhouse structures. This requirement does not apply to a shared circulation aisle OUTDOOR LEISURE AREAS A leisure area must be landscaped on any landsite occupied by a use in the Housing (h1) group, except for a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category. The leisure area must be grassed or otherwise landscaped with planting, and must not contain any building. A structure or a piece of equipment intended for leisure use, such as a swimming pool, a play structure, a patio or an area for sports, may be installed in the leisure area subject to the provisions applicable in virtue of Article 0. The leisure area must be accessible to all occupants of the dwelling units. The minimum surface area for the leisure area is determined as follows: 1 For a use in the Two-family or three-family dwelling (h2) category: 50 m² per dwelling unit. 2 For a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category: 35 m² per dwelling unit. 3 For a use in the Collective housing (h4) category: 20 m² per room or per dwelling unit. For the application of the present article, the following must be subtracted from the minimum surface area required for the leisure area: the area of any balcony, veranda, terrace or patio with a depth and a width of no more than 1.8 m and an area of no more than 4 m², the use of which is exclusively for the occupant of a dwelling unit or a room. Also to be subtracted is the surface area of any communal outdoor terrace that is located on the building and accessible to all occupants of the dwelling units or rooms. SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

239 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING REQUIREMENTS M R On a landsite occupied by a building housing a use of the following groups: Commercial (c), Community (p), Industrial (i) and Recreational (r) a strip of greenery must be installed of a minimum width of 2 m along the street boundary and of a width of 1 m along any landsite boundary. The strip of greenery must be grassed or otherwise landscaped with planting, so as not to leave any bare ground. An accessory structure, an accessory building, an accessory use or accessory equipment for, or a projection from, a main building listed in Chapter 8 may encroach onto the strip of greenery. (CA ; ) Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

240 OUTDOOR LEISURE AREAS FOR A ROOM OR A DWELLING UNIT A leisure area must be installed on any landsite occupied by a main use of Tourist home (5834) and on any landsite occupied by a building, other than a dwelling, that houses a main use in the Housing (h) group. The leisure area must have a minimum surface area of 35 m² per dwelling unit and 20 m² per room or lodging unit. The following must be subtracted from the minimum surface area required for the leisure area: the area of any balcony, veranda, terrace or patio with a depth and a width of no more than 1.8 m and an area of no more than 4 m², the use of which is exclusively for the occupant of a dwelling unit or a room. Also to be subtracted is the surface area of any communal outdoor terrace located on the building and accessible to all occupants of the dwelling units or rooms. The leisure area must be grassed or otherwise landscaped with planting and must not contain any building. A structure or a piece of equipment intended for leisure use, such as a swimming pool, a play structure, a patio or an area for sports, may be installed in the leisure area subject to the provisions applicable in virtue of Chapter 8. The leisure area must be accessible to all occupants of the dwelling units or lodging units. The provisions in the present article apply in addition to the landscaping requirements applicable to a use in another group of uses in virtue of Article 0. However, the strip of greenery required in virtue of Article 0 may be used to form part of the leisure area LANDSCAPING FOR A BUFFER STRIP BORDERING A DWELLING In the case of a landsite occupied by a main use in the Commercial (c), Industrial (i) or Recreational (r) group or in the Institutions (p2) or Services (p3) category of use, a buffer strip must be installed on the landsite, along the entire length of a landsite boundary line, other than a street line, that forms a boundary with a landsite occupied exclusively by a use in the Housing (h) group or with a landsite that is on the boundary of another borough. The buffer strip must be contiguous with the landsite boundary line, be installed along its entire length, except for a landsite entrance, an access aisle or a pedestrian access, and be composed of the following elements: 1 An opaque fence at least 1.8 m high. Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

241 223 2 A strip of greenery at least 3 m wide, measured from the landsite boundary line, composed of vegetation at least 1.8 m high and designed so as to cover any bare ground or an evergreen tree plantation. A stand of conifers or a dense evergreen hedge, planted so as to create a visual screen. The trees or shrubs must be at least 2 m high at the time of planting. The conifers may be spaced at intervals of no more than 3 m, centre to centre. The buffer strip must be completed within 12 months of the date of the issuance of the building permit or certificate of authorization. The present article does not apply in the following cases: 1 When the use in the Housing (h) group is not authorized in the zone. 2 When the use in the Housing (h) group is located in a zone in which the main land use occupation is not Housing (h). 3 When Article 240 applies LANDSCAPING OF A BUFFER STRIP BORDERING A ZONE IN WHICH THE MAIN LAND USE OCCUPATION IS HOUSING (H), OR BORDERING A RECREATION (P1) OR INSTITUTION (P2) USE In the case of a landsite occupied by a main use in the Industrial (i) or by the Heavy arterial commercial activities, wholesale businesses and para-industrial services (c5) or Services (p3) category of uses, a buffer strip must be installed on the landsite, along the entire length of a landsite boundary line, other than a street line, that forms a boundary with a zone in which the main land use occupation is Housing (h) or that forms a boundary with a zone in which a use in the Recreation (p1) or Institutions (p2) category of uses is authorized. In addition to the provisions applicable in the first clause, a buffer strip must be installed along the entire length of any landsite boundary line that forms a boundary with a landsite occupied by a main use in the Extraction and primary processing of raw materials (i3) use category. The buffer strip must conform to the following provisions: 1 The buffer strip must be contiguous with the landsite boundary line, be installed along its entire length, except across a landsite entrance, an access aisle or a pedestrian access, and be at least 5 m wide, measured from the landsite boundary line. 2 Conifers or a dense evergreen hedge must be planted along the entire length of the buffer strip, except across a landsite entrance, an access aisle or a pedestrian access, so as to Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

242 224 create a visual screen. The trees or shrubs must be at least 2 m high at the time of their planting. The conifers may be planted at intervals of no more than 3 m, centre to centre. 3 The buffer strip must be grassed or otherwise landscaped so as to cover any bare ground. 4 In a case where the buffer strip is occupied by existing woodland, the planting of trees is not required insofar as the woodland becomes an integral part thereof and the continuity of the conifers conforms to the provisions in Paragraph 2. The buffer strip must be completed within 12 months of the date of the issuance of the building permit or certificate of authorization. SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 241. LANDSCAPING OF OPEN AREAS FOR A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP The provisions in the present chapter apply to an additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group. Chapter 12 : Provisions relative to the landscaping of open areas

243 225 CHAPTER 13 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE PLANTING AND FELLING OF TREES SECTION 1: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE PLANTING OF TREES 242. TREE PLANTING REQUIRED During the construction or enlargement of a main building or when a certificate of authorization for tree felling has been issued, trees must be planted on the landsite on which the work is being carried out, in accordance with the following methods: 1 In the case of a landsite occupied, or destined to be occupied, exclusively by a main use in the Housing (h) group, or in the case of a landsite occupied by an additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm, the following rules apply: a) At least 1 tree per lot must be planted on a landsite occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) and Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) categories; b) At least 1 tree per 250 m² of landsite area must be planted on a landsite occupied by a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) and Collective housing (h4) categories; c) At least 50% of the trees to be planted must be planted in the front yard: if only one tree is required, it must be planted in the front yard; d) Any mature trees existing on the landsite at the time of the construction of the main building may be included in the calculation for the number of trees required above. Chapter 13 : Provisions relative to the planting and felling of trees

244 226 2 In the case of a landsite occupied or destined to be occupied by a main use that is not in the Housing (h) group, or is not in a zone in which the main use land use occupation is Agricultural (A), at least 1 tree per 12 linear metres of the width of the landsite, and of the depth of the landsite in the case of a corner landsite, as the case may be, must be planted bordering any street line. The trees required in the grassed or otherwise landscaped strip bordering any off-street parking area with 5 spaces or more in virtue of Article 0 may be included in the calculation for the number of trees required in the present paragraph. For the application of the present article, a tree must have the following dimensions at the time of its planting: 1 Diameter of more than 5 cm measured at 25 cm from the adjacent grade level for a deciduous tree. 2 Height of at least 2 m for a conifer. When the calculation for the number of trees required in virtue of the present article gives a result with a fraction, the result must be rounded up to the nearest whole number. The planting of trees required in virtue of the present article must be completed within 12 months of the date of the issuance of the building permit or certificate of authorization. Once planted, the trees must be maintained in good condition in terms of maintenance and preservation. Should a tree need to be felled because it is dead, has an incurable disease or is dangerous, it must be replaced within 30 days of felling. SECTION 2 : PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO TREE MAINTENANCE 243. PRESERVATION, MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT OF TREES REQUIRED TO BE PLANTED ON A LANDSITE A tree that is required to be planted in virtue of Article 242 must be preserved and maintained so as to extend its life. Severe pruning or topping of a tree is not authorized. The creation of lesions, incisions or notches, or the use of substances that could kill the tree, is also prohibited. Chapter 13 : Provisions relative to the planting and felling of trees

245 227 Should a tree need to be felled because it is dead, has an incurable disease or is dangerous, it must be replaced within 30 days of felling PROTECTION OF TREES PRESENT ON A LANDSITE DURING CONSTRUCTION OR LANDSCAPING WORK Trees with a DBH equal to or greater than 10 cm, present on a vacant landsite intended to be occupied by a main building or on a built landsite on which a main building is to be enlarged, must all be protected. During construction work, the felling of trees must be limited to the area within the perimeter of the main structure, including a strip maximum 5 m wide, with the exception of accessory structures. When trees need to be protected, the following provisions apply to encourage their survival: 1 Trees that need to be protected must be clearly identified on the site. 2 The existing grade level around the tree must not be modified. The only modifications possible are the removal of turf and the planting of herbaceous vegetation in its place, as well as the installation of a tree well around each tree or a common tree well for a group of trees in the same sector, all for the purpose of protecting the trees. 3 These tree wells must be at least 3 m in diameter when they surround a tree with a DBH of less than 25 cm. In the case of a tree with a DBH of 25 cm or more, the well diameter must not be less than 6 m. 4 A fence with a minimum height of 1.2 m must be erected around a protection zone with a radius on the ground, measured from the tree, of 10 cm for every centimetre of DBH of the tree to be protected. This fence must be maintained in good condition and remain in place throughout the construction or landscaping work. 5 If work must be carried out inside the zone delineated in Paragraph 4, a layer of noncompacting material, such as uniform, coarse gravel, wood chips or equivalent material, to a minimum thickness of 30 cm, must be spread over the surface of any area involved in the construction or landscaping work. This material must be placed over a geotextile membrane permeable to air and water. Chapter 13 : Provisions relative to the planting and felling of trees

246 228 6 Materials may not be stored, machinery moved or cars parked within the zone delineated in Paragraph 4. 7 Branches likely to be damaged must be protected or pruned back in accordance with best practices. If, despite these precautions, branches are damaged during the work, they must be pruned back immediately. 8 Roots more than 5 cm in diameter uncovered during excavation work must be severed cleanly with a sharp cutting tool. 9 Using a tree as a support during construction, demolition or leveling work is prohibited. Any mature trees that should have been protected but were not preserved must be replaced by trees in conformity with Article 0. SECTION 3 : PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE FELLING OF TREES 245. TREE FELLING Other than the normal meaning, the following are considered as tree felling operations: 1 Removal of more than 50% of the living crown; 2 Severing, by pruning or cutting, of more than 50% of the root system; 3 Covering the root system with an excessive backfill layer of 20 cm or more; 4 Any other action having a causal link with the death of a tree that involves, in particular, the use of a toxic product to ill a tree, destroying a tree or creating lesions or having lesions created, more or less all around the trunk of a tree, in the bark, in the secondary phloem or in the wood. Chapter 13 : Provisions relative to the planting and felling of trees

247 229 A certificate of authorization for the felling of a tree must be issued in one or other of the following situations: 1 The tree is dead. 2 The tree shows evidence of irreversible dieback, possibly due to insect infestation or an incurable disease for which control methods cannot be applied and for which tree felling is the only intervention recommended to avoid transmitting the problem to other neighboring trees. 3 The tree shows evidence of a structural defect affecting its sturdiness. 4 The tree constitutes a nuisance for the growth of neighboring trees of greater ecological value. 5 The tree is located on the site, or more than 5 m, of a proposed structure, unless the structure is a sign, an accessory structure or a retaining wall. In addition, in the case where a tree, the felling of which is desired, is located in a wood identified on the map Le patrimoine naturel in Appendix H, and the felling of which is for the purpose of erecting a new building or enlarging an existing building, the proposed work must be conceived so as to maximize the preservation of trees of great ecological or aesthetic interest. Normal inconveniences related to the presence of a tree, in particular the falling of twigs, leaves, flowers or fruit, the presence of roots on the surface of the ground, the presence of insects or animals, shade, unpleasant odours, sap or honeydew excretions or the release of pollen, do not constitute nuisances or damage. Should the courtyard be re-landscaped, one tree may be felled provided that it is replaced by at least two trees within three months. Chapter 13 : Provisions relative to the planting and felling of trees

248 230 CHAPTER 14 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE ARCHITECTURE AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE BUILDINGS SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 246. FORM AND APPEARANCE OF THE BUILDINGS A building may not be in the form of a human being, an animal, a fruit, a vegetable, a container, a household appliance, a piece of furniture, a tank, a vehicle or part of a vehicle or any other similar object. A building may not be in the form of a dome or an arch if it is clad in a metal material STRUCTURE THAT MAY NOT BE USED AS A BUILDING It is not permitted to use a tent-trailer, a container, a trailer, another type of vehicle or part of a vehicle, including a rail or tram car, as a building, to convert such a structure into a building or to install such a structure, permanently or temporarily, on a landsite in order to carry out a main, additional, dependent or accessory use therein. Notwithstanding the first clause, it is permitted to install a temporary tent-trailer on a landsite as a site office or real estate sales office, during a fair, festival, public celebration or circus event, or as a stand for the outdoor sale of Christmas trees MODULAR OR SINGLE-MODULE BUILDING It is not permitted to use a modular or single-module building for carrying out a main, additional, dependent or accessory use, unless the use comes under code 471 Telephone communication, centre and network (except the use 4711 Telephone exchange ) in the sub-category The production of public services and related activities (p3b). Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

249 231 Notwithstanding the first clause, it is permitted to install a modular or single-module building temporarily on a landsite as a site office or real estate sales office, for outdoor display in accordance with the provisions in Article 0, during a fair, festival, public celebration or circus event, or as a stand for the outdoor sale of Christmas trees EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS PROHIBITED FOR A ROOF The following materials are prohibited, in all zones, as exterior cladding materials for the roof of a building or for the roof of a rooftop structure: 1 Black roofing paper or similar paper. 2 Plastic sheeting, roof tarpaulin or fibreglass fabric. 3 Straw. 4 Ungalvanized aluminium or steel sheet, except for factory pre-painted or pre-baked metal sheet. 5 Panel made of fibreglass, polycarbonate, PVC or other derivative material. Paragraph 4 does not apply to a building occupied by a main use in the Agricultural (a) group or to an accessory use for this main use, but it does apply to a building occupied by the additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm. Paragraph 5 does not apply to a veranda, a solarium, a canopy or an awning in the Housing (h) group and located in a rear yard EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR WALLS The exterior cladding materials authorized in all zones for a wall of a building are limited to the following: 1 Clay, concrete or sand-lime brick; 2 Natural or reconstituted stone; 3 Ribbed glass block; Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

250 232 4 Glass (curtain wall); 5 Noble architectural block or concrete architectural block, split-faced or grooved; 6 Concrete architectural panel; Stucco, with or without the addition of natural aggregates, with or without color added; 7 Synthetic stucco, with or without the addition of natural aggregates, with or without color added; 8 Cedar, square log (pièce sur pièce) structures, torrefied wood siding or pressure-treated wood; 9 Vinyl, aluminium or masonite plank siding or panel; 10 Factory pre-painted or pre-baked steel sheet or panel; 11 Fibre reinforced cement panel or plank; 12 Galvanized or pre-painted aluminium. The present article does not apply to a solarium, a glazed atrium, a greenhouse or a building used temporarily in accordance with the provisions in the present by-law MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF EXTERIOR WOOD CLADDING All exterior cladding must be maintained in good condition so as to preserve its quality and original appearance. All exterior wood cladding, with the exception of cedar, must be protected against inclement weather by a coat of paint, stain or varnish, siding with a baked finish or any other rendering or method certified for the protection of exterior wood cladding. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

251 REQUIREMENTS COMMON TO ALL USE GROUPS In all cases, no more than 3 different cladding materials may be used on the walls of a building. For the interpretation of the present clause, masonry elements such as brick, stone and concrete block are considered as being a single exterior cladding material. In addition, materials used for doors, windows, soffits, verandas, balconies and other similar components are not taken into account when calculating the number of exterior cladding materials authorized. The underside of a projecting or cantilevered window, and the top, as the case may be, must be clad, on the projecting or cantilevered portion only, in an authorized material. Gables and dormers must be clad in an authorized material. Pre-fabricated decorative panels or elements may be made of a plastic material and this material is not taken into account when calculating the number of materials authorized. All walls of a building must have a minimum height of 2.3 m above the visible foundations and be clad in a required material, established in accordance with the use group. When it is necessary to calculate an area to determine the surface authorized for a type of material, this calculation takes into account the total wall surface, whether or not there are openings such as doors and windows UNIFORMITY OF EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR A BUILDING WITH A SEMI-DETACHED OR ROWHOUSE STRUCTURE All façades of a building, including the front façades of consecutive units and the side façades located on the ends of a row or group of units, as well as the roofs, must have the same exterior cladding materials EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR THE RENOVATION OF A MAIN BUILDING For an exterior renovation of a main building, in which the material is non-conforming, the conditions listed in article 358 are applicable. For the exterior cladding materials authorized for this façade must meet the requirements prescribed in articles 262 to 264 and 268. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

252 234 In addition, only an authorized material may be used for the addition or enlargement of a portico. For a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category, the conversion of a private garage, attached to or integrated into the main building as a habitable room, is authorized on condition that the exterior walls of the private garage are integrated with those of the main building EXTERIOR CLADDING MATERIALS FOR A BUILDING LOCATED ON A CORNER LANDSITE, A CORNER THROUGH LANDSITE OR A THROUGH LANDSITE The exterior cladding materials authorized for a building located on a corner landsite, a corner through landsite or a through landsite must be the same as those used for the main façade of the building ROOF SHAPES Mansard roofs are permitted only for a building occupied by a use in the category Single-family dwelling (h1) for the type cottage, but may cover only the complete second storey. Except in the case of an enlargement of a non-conforming building protected by acquired rights, flat roofs are prohibited for a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category. No portion of the roof may have a slope of less than 4 / MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR THE BUILDING Mechanical equipment for the building, located on the roof, must be placed so as not to be visible from the street or from landsites contiguous with the landsite on which the building is located or be completely concealed by an architectural screen made of the exterior cladding materials authorized for the walls of the building. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

253 ROOFTOP STRUCTURE AND ROOFTOP HOUSING FOR EQUIPMENT A rooftop structure or a rooftop housing for equipment located on the roof of a building must be at least 4.5 m away from the side or front walls and be completely concealed by an architectural screen made of the exterior cladding materials authorized for the walls of the building. This provision does not apply to a glazed elevator from which the view is to the outside of the building PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO MICROCLIMATIC EFFECTS The provisions in the present article apply to the construction of any new main building that presents the following two characteristics: 1 Its height is at least 23 m or more than 6 storeys; 2 Its height exceeds, by at least half, the average height in metres of buildings located within a radius of 50 m. For the application of the present article, a building with a height that is not in conformity with the provisions of the zoning bylaw in force is excluded from the calculation of the average height. The following provisions apply to a structure targeted by the present article: 1 The structure must try to avoid having an effect on the amounts of natural daylight and sunlight reaching neighbouring residential properties and the amount of sunlight reaching streets, parks and public places. 2 The structure must not create wind impacts with an average speed at ground level, calculated hourly, greater than 15 km/h in winter and 22 km/h in summer, with a maximum surpassing frequency of 25% of the time on a public thoroughfare and 10% of the time in a park, public place or area for relaxation. 3 The structure must not create wind gusts at ground level that exceed a ground speed of 75 km/h for more than 1% of the time; the period of reference for measuring the gust is 2 seconds or less, with 2% turbulence. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

254 FOUNDATIONS A main building occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) or Two-family or threefamily dwelling (h2) category must be on a continuous foundation. However, a part of a building in these groups, with an area of less than 25 m 2, may be erected on poured concrete piers or on helical piers, on condition that they are approved by an engineer and are hidden from view from the street by means of a coniferous hedge or a fence. The above-ground portion of the continuous foundation must be covered with a cement rendering. The foundation wall that is above ground on the main façade must not be apparent beyond a height of 400 mm above the grade level adjacent to that wall STORAGE AREA In an indoor storage area with a minimum floor area of two square metres (2 m 2 ) per dwelling unit must be provided in a building occupied by a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category. SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 262. EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING (H1) CATEGORY All walls on the first floor, up to a height above the foundation of 2.3 m, of a building occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category must be clad in masonry or fibre reinforced cement. When the building has only one storey or one and a half storeys, this requirement applies up to the underside of the roof. However, it is permitted to use another type of exterior cladding material on cantilevered walls, on condition that this other type of material occupies an area of not more than 30% of the total surface area of each façade and that it is included in the list of authorized exterior cladding materials listed in Article 250. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

255 EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE TWO-FAMILY OR THREE-FAMILY DWELLING (H2) CATEGORY All walls, measured from the foundation up to the level of the ceiling on the second floor, of a building occupied by a use in the Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) category must be clad in masonry. However, it is permitted to use another type of exterior cladding material, on condition that this other type of material occupies an area of not more than 30% of the total surface area of each façade of the building, that it is placed above the foundation by at least 2.3 m, and that it is included in the list of authorized exterior cladding materials listed in Article EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A USE IN THE MULTI-FAMILY DWELLING (H3) AND COLLECTIVE HOUSING (H4) CATEGORIES All walls in a building occupied by a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) and Collective housing (h4) categories must be clad in stone, brick, architectural concrete or glass. However, it is permitted to use another type of exterior cladding material, on condition that this other type of material occupies an area of not more than 30% of the total surface area of each façade of the building, that it is placed above the foundation by at least 2.3 m, and that it is included in the list of authorized exterior cladding materials listed in Article EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A PRIVATE GARAGE DETACHED FROM THE MAIN BUILDING All walls of a private garage detached from a main building that are visible from a street must be clad in an authorized material that is similar to that or those used to clad the main building that it serves. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

256 VOLUMETRY OF DETACHED AND SEMI-DETACHED DWELLINGS A building serving a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1), Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) and Collective Housing (h4) categories where the structure is detached or semidetached must have, on the main or side façade, a minimum setback of 60 cm on at least one storey, or offer two different roof heights. The main façade or the façade with the main entrance to the building serving a use in the Multifamily dwelling (h3) category must have a minimum setback of 60 cm up the entire height of the building. On the side façade, chimneys are not considered as setbacks NUMBER AND EXTERIOR APPEARANCE OF GARAGE DOORS IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP The maximum prescribed width for a single garage door is set at 3 m, and that for a double garage door is set at 5m. The maximum number of garage doors for uses in the Housing (h) group is established as follows: 1 For uses in the Single-family dwelling (h1) and Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) categories that have a maximum of 2 dwelling units and a detached or semi-detached structure, 2 single doors or 1 double door may be installed on the main façade of each building. 2 For uses in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category with a rowhouse structure and in the Two-family and three-family dwelling (h2) category that have a maximum of 3 dwelling units and a detached or semi-detached structure, 1 single or double door may be installed on the main façade of each unit. 3 For uses in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) and Collective Housing (h4) categories, garage doors are permitted on any façade facing a street on condition that is it not visible from the street. A maximum of 4 single or double doors may be installed per building. In all cases, there must never be more than 2 consecutive garage doors. For the purposes of the present article, doors must be at least 3.65 m apart in order for them not to be considered consecutive. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

257 239 SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS 268. EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED All walls of a building, from the foundation up, must be clad in stone, brick, architectural concrete panels or glass. However, it is permitted to use another type of exterior cladding material, on condition that this other type of material is placed at a distance of at least 2.3 m above the foundation, that it is included in the list of authorized exterior cladding materials listed in Article 250 and that it does not exceed the following proportions, established according to the type of use: 1 50% of the surface area of each façade of a building occupied by a use in the Commercial (c) group, except for the specific use 6541 Childcare services for 10 or more children, or by a use in the Industrial (i) group. 2 10% of the surface area of each façade of a building occupied by a use in the Community (p) or Recreational (r) group or the specific use 6541 Childcare services for 10 or more children PROVISION APPLICABLE TO A GARAGE SERVING A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C) GROUP The total width of a garage door installed on a building occupied by a use in Commercial (c) group and facing a street is limited to 7.6 m. If it is on a wall facing a street, a garage door must be completely glazed. SECTION 4: PROVISION APPLICABLE TO USES IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 270. FORM AND APPEARANCE OF AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS Notwithstanding Article 246, a building occupied by a use in the Agricultural (a) group may be in the form of a dome or an arch if it is clad in a metal material. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

258 EXTERIOR WALL CLADDING MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR AN AGRICULTURAL BUILDING Notwithstanding Article 249, aluminium sheet, ungalvanized steel sheet, concrete block, cotton fabric, plastic sheeting or vinyl sheeting may be used as an exterior cladding material on a wall of a building occupied by a use in the Agricultural (a) group ARCHITECTURE OF A BUILDING FOR A DWELLING ASSOCIATED WITH A FARM The provisions of the present chapter apply to the additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group. Chapter 14 : Provisions relative to the architecture and the construction of the buiding

259 241 CHAPTER 15 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO FENCES AND WALLS SECTION 1: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL USES 273. SITING OF A FENCE OR A WALL A fence or a wall must be installed at a minimum distance of 2 m from any street line and at least 1 m from any fire hydrant MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A FENCE Only the following materials are authorized for the construction of a fence: 1 Ornamental metal assembly, such as wrought iron, welded iron or aluminium, cast iron assembly. 2 Steel or aluminium chain link with a tubular frame. 3 Wood or PVC lattice. 4 Wood planking and wood shingles. 5 Un-planed, natural wood rails. 6 Concrete, wood or metal for the support posts for the fence. 7 Polyvinyl chloride resin (PVC). In addition to the materials listed in the first clause, it is permitted to use factory pre-baked, pre-painted sheet metal for the construction of a fence around a storage area if the landsite is located in a zone in which the main land use occupation is Industrial (i) or if it is used by a use in the The production of public services and related activities (p3b) use category. Components of a fence must be maintained in good condition at all times. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

260 MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL Only the following materials are authorized for the construction of a wall other than a retaining wall: 1 Masonry in fieldstone, dressed stone, brick or architectural block or split-faced or grooved block. 2 Masonry in breezeblock or non-architectural concrete block, provided that the entire surface is covered with cement or acrylic rendering or with decorative elements made of moulded concrete. Concrete may be used for the foundations or for the coping on a wall or a pier. Decorative elements made of moulded concrete may be inserted. No part of the foundations of a wall may be visible on the side facing the street for a height distance of more than 40 cm above the finished grade level. Components of a wall must be maintained in good condition at all times SNOW FENCE A snow fence is permitted between October 15 of one year and April 15 of the following year. It may be installed anywhere on the landsite. However, it may not be used to separate circulation aisles or shared parking areas OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE ON A CONSTRUCTION SITE When construction work is being carried out within 2 m of the line of a public thoroughfare, the construction site must be fenced to provide protection for the public MATERIALS AUTHORIZED FOR A RETAINING WALL Only the following materials may be used for the construction of a retaining wall: 1 Masonry element. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

261 243 2 Dry stone. 3 Grading block. Non-architectural concrete blocks used for the construction of a retaining wall must be completely hidden by a fence that is opaque over 80% of its surface, by a coniferous hedge or by wood trellis, covered in climbing plants, on which the spaces between the trellis slats are not more than 5 cm across. A geo-textile fabric must be installed on the side of the wall that retains the earth, and a drain must be placed in accordance with best practices. Components of a retaining wall must be maintained in good condition at all times OBLIGATION TO ERECT A RETAINING WALL A retaining wall must be erected on a landsite when the grade is higher than that of the neighbouring landsite by 1 m, measured inside a strip 2 m wide on each side of the contiguous landsite boundary line OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE ON A RETAINING WALL A retaining wall must have a fence, minimum 1 m high, installed on top of it, at locations where the wall is more than 1.8 m high; this height is measured up the side of the wall at the point where the grade level is lowest. SECTION 2: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP 281 MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL The maximum height for a fence or a wall other than a retaining wall located on a landsite on which is erected a building that houses, exclusively, a main use in the Housing (h) group is: m in the front yard. 2 2 m in all setbacks and in yards not targeted in paragraph 1. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

262 244 Notwithstanding Paragraph 1, when the depth of the front yard is greater than 15 m, a fence may have a maximum height of 1.6 m, on condition that the fence is made of ornamental wrought iron and masonry piers, placed at least 2.5 m apart OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP A fence must be installed on a landsite occupied by or intended to be occupied by a use in the Multi-family dwelling (h3) category when this landsite is adjacent to a landsite occupied by or intended to be occupied by a use in the Single-family dwelling (h1) category. The fence must be installed on the landsite boundary line that separates the two uses, be 2 m high and consist of openwork for a maximum of 20% of its surface. Notwithstanding the first clause, a coniferous hedge may replace the fence on condition that the hedge is 2 m high OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN A REAR YARD AND A STREET LINE When the rear yard of a landsite occupied by a use in the Housing (h) group is adjacent to a street, a fence or a coniferous hedge must be installed in the rear yard. The fence must be chain link and be openwork for a maximum of 20% of its surface. The fence or coniferous hedge must be at least 1.8 m high. In the case of a fence installed on top of a retaining wall, the fence must extend to the lowest grade level so as to hide the wall FENCE OR WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL FOR A HOUSING DEVELOPMENT A fence, wall or hedge must be installed on a landsite on which a housing development with 5 or more dwelling units is being constructed. The fence, wall or hedge must be 2 m high. If the wall includes piers, these may be maximum 2.5 m high and they must be placed at least 2.5 m apart. These piers may be topped with ornamentation, to make a total height of 3.5 m. In addition, the entrances to the development may be emphasized with piers up to 4 m high, including ornamentation. In all cases, the triangle of visibility must be respected. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

263 245 SECTION 3: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE COMMERCIAL (C), INDUSTRIAL (I), COMMUNITY (P) AND RECREATIONAL (R) GROUPS 285. MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF A FENCE OR WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL The maximum height of a fence or wall other than a retaining wall, located on a landsite on which is erected a building that houses a use in the Commercial (c), Industrial (i), Community (p) and Recreational (r) groups, is as follows: m in the front yard. 2 2 m in all yards not targeted in Paragraph 1. An opaque fence is not permitted in a front yard OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN USES IN THE HOUSING (H) GROUP A chain link fence must be installed on a landsite occupied by or intended to be occupied by a use in the Commercial (c) or Industrial (i) group when this landsite is adjacent to a landsite occupied by or intended to be occupied by a use in the Housing (h) or Community (p) group. The fence must be installed on the landsite boundary line separating these two uses, be 2 m high and have visual openings over a maximum of 20% of its surface through privacy slats or conifer plantings OBLIGATION TO INSTALL A FENCE BETWEEN A REAR YARD AND A STREET LINE When the rear yard of a landsite occupied by a use in the Commercial (c), Industrial (i), Community (p) or Recreational (r) group is adjacent to a street, a fence or a coniferous hedge must be installed in the rear yard. The fence must be chain link and be openwork over a maximum of 20% of its surface. The fence or the hedge must be at least 1.85 m high. This article does not apply if the rear yard is occupied by an off-street parking area and if an embankment has been installed in conformity with Article 201. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

264 BARBED WIRE ON TOP OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL Notwithstanding Article 274, it is permitted to install barbed wire on top of a fence or a wall located on a landsite on which is erected a building that houses a main use in the Industrial (i) group, in the Commercial (c) group, in the Service (p3) use category, in the Recreational (r) group, or uses in the sub-category p2d, on the following conditions: 1 The fence on which the barbed wire is installed is located in the rear yard. 2 The barbed wire is installed facing towards the interior of the landsite at the top of the fence or the wall, forming a 45 angle with the fence or wall. 3 The barbed wire must not consist of more than 3 strands. 4 The barbed wire must be installed on a fence or a wall, other than a retaining wall, with a height of at least 2 m. SECTION 4: PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP 289. FENCE OR WALL FOR A USE IN THE AGRICULTURAL (A) GROUP The provisions of the present chapter apply to an additional use of Dwelling associated with a farm as if it were a main use in the Housing (h) group BARBED WIRE ON TOP OF A FENCE OR A WALL OTHER THAN A RETAINING WALL Notwithstanding Article 274, it is permitted to install barbed wire on top of a fence or a wall located on a landsite occupied by a main use in the Agricultural (a) group, unless the fence or wall is adjacent to a landsite occupied by the Housing (h) or Community (p) groups. Chapter 15 : Provisions relative to fences and walls

265 247 CHAPTER 16 PROVISIONS RELATIVE TO THE PROTECTION OF RIVERBANKS AND SHORELINES SECTION 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS 291. WATERCOURSES AND LAKES TARGETED The provisions in the present section apply to all parts of the riverbank or shoreline of a lake or a watercourse PROTECTION OF THE SHORELINE The installation of a work project or a structure and the execution of the work involved therein, including earthmoving, are prohibited on or above the shoreline of a lake or a watercourse. Notwithstanding the first clause, the following work projects, structures and work are permitted, if their execution is not incompatible with other protection measures prescribed for flood plains: 1 A wharf, quay or shelter for boat passengers built on piers or pilings, or a floating dock. 2 Installation of water intakes. 3 Encroachment on the shoreline necessary for work to stabilize the bank when such work is authorized. 4 Installations for water crossings such as fords, culverts and bridges. 5 Installation, for agricultural purposes, of channels to direct or divert water for drawing off water in cases where the installation of these channels is subject to obtaining an authorization in virtue of the Environment Quality Act (R.S.Q., c.q-2). Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines

266 248 6 Maintenance, repair or demolition of an existing structure or work project that is not used for municipal, industrial, commercial or public purposes or for public access. 7 Cleaning and maintenance, without excavation, of a watercourse, carried out by the municipality under the powers conferred to it or the duties incumbent on it in virtue of the law. 8 Structures, work projects and work for municipal, commercial, industrial or public purposes or for public access, including their maintenance, repair or demolition, authorized in virtue of the Environment Quality Act (R.S.Q., c.q-2), the Act respecting the conservation and development of wildlife (R.S.Q., c-c6.1), the Watercourses Act (R.S.Q., c R-13) WIDTH OF THE RIVERBANK For the application of the provisions in the present chapter, the width of a riverbank is established as follows: 1 The riverbank is 10 m wide, measured horizontally from the line of high water towards the interior of the land: a) When the landsite has a continuous slope of less than or equal to 30%. b) When the landsite has an embankment less than 5 m high with a slope of more than 30%. 2 The riverbank is 15 m wide, measured horizontally from the line of high water towards the interior of the land: a) When the landsite has a continuous slope of more than 30%. b) When the landsite has an embankment of more than 5 m high. Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines

267 249 Riverbank with continuous slope of less than or equal to 30% Riverbank with an embankment less than 5 metres high and a slope of more than 30% Riverbank with a continuous slope of more than 30% Riverbank with an embankment more than 5 metres high Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines

268 PROTECTION OF THE RIVERBANK The installation of a work project or a structure and the execution of the work involved therein, including earthmoving and tree felling, are prohibited on or above the shoreline of a lake or a watercourse. Notwithstanding the first clause, the following work projects, structures and work are permitted, if their execution is not incompatible with other protection measures prescribed for flood plains: 1 Maintenance, repair or demolition of an existing structure or work project that is not used for municipal, industrial, commercial or public purposes or for public access. 2 Construction or enlargement of a main building that is not used for municipal, industrial, commercial or public purposes or for public access, under the following conditions: a) The dimensions of the lot no longer permit the construction or enlargement of this main building following the creation of a protection strip for the riverbank, and it cannot be reasonably carried out elsewhere on the landsite; b) The subdivision was done prior to the coming into force of the first municipal bylaw prohibiting construction on the bank, i.e., December 21,1983; c) The lot is not located in a zone at high risk for erosion; d) It is obligatory to preserve a protection strip for the riverbank, with a minimum width of 5 m, in its current state, or to landscape it in order to return it to its natural state. 3 The construction of an accessory building such as a garage, a storage shed or a garden shed, or the construction of a swimming pool in the part containing the protection strip for the riverbank that is not in its natural state, under the following conditions: a) The dimensions of the lot no longer permit the construction of this accessory building, following the creation of the protection strip for the riverbank; b) The subdivision was done prior to the coming into force of the first municipal bylaw prohibiting construction on the riverbank, i.e., December 21,1983; Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines

269 251 c) It is obligatory to preserve a protection strip for the riverbank, with a minimum width of 5 m, in its current state, or to landscape it in order to return it to its natural state; d) The accessory building must stand on the land without any earthmoving. 4 Installation of fences. 5 Installation or construction of outfalls from the underground or surface drainage system and installation of pumping stations. 6 Installation of water crossings such as fords, culverts and bridges, as well as paths and roadways providing access to them. 7 Any septic installation in conformity with the Regulation respecting waste water disposal systems for isolated dwellings (R.S.Q., 1981, c.q-2, r.8). 8 Stabilization work, by means of planting vegetation or by mechanical means, for the bank when the slope, the nature of the soil and the landsite conditions do not allow the vegetation cover and the natural character of the bank to be re-established. The stabilization work, whether planted or mechanical, must be carried out using riprap, gabions or retaining walls and must, in this case, be carried out by giving priority to the technique most likely to facilitate the future installation of natural vegetation and attached to the present by-law as Appendix J and forming an integral part thereof. 9 Installation of individual wells. 10 Reconstruction or enlargement of an existing highway or road, including farm roads. 11 Installations and work necessary for carrying out construction, projects and work authorized on the shoreline in conformity with Article Structures, installations and work for municipal, commercial, industrial and public purposes and for public access, including their maintenance, repair or demolition, authorized in virtue of the Environment Quality Act (R.S.Q., c.q-2). 13 Sanitation cutting: under no circumstances may sanitation cutting leave the soil bare. Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines

270 Tree felling necessary for the installation of an authorized structure or work project. 15 When the slope of the riverbank is less than 30%, the work and the installations necessary for creating an opening to provide access to a watercourse, with a maximum width of 5 m, created by pruning and trimming or by the felling of trees and bushes. 16 When the slope of the riverbank is greater than 30%, the creation of a window with a maximum width of 5 m, created by pruning and trimming of trees and bushes, as well as a footpath or staircase providing access to the body of water. 17 The sowing and the planting of plants, trees and shrubs for the purpose of re-establishing a sustainable, permanent vegetation cover, and the work necessary for these purposes. 18 Cultivating the soil for farming purposes inside the permanent agricultural zone under the meaning of the Act respecting the preservation of agricultural land and agricultural activities (P-41.1) under the following conditions: a) A protection strip for the rivebank, 1 m wide measured from the top of the embankment towards the interior of the land, must be maintained in cases where there is an embankment and the distance between the base of the embankment and the high-water mark is less than 3 m. b) A protection strip for the bank, 1 m wide measured from the top of the embankment towards the interior of the land, must be maintained in cases where there is no embankment and the distance between the base of the embankment and the line of high water is less than 3 m. Chapter 16 : Provisions relative to the protection of riverbanks and shorelines